Kyocera Km 3050 Operation Manual ManualsLib Makes It Easy To Find Manuals Online!

2014-12-11

: Kyocera Kyocera-Km-3050-Operation-Manual-120445 kyocera-km-3050-operation-manual-120445 kyocera pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 322

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

3050
4050
5050

Advanced Operation Guide

Introduction
Thank you for your purchase of 3050, 4050 and 5050.
This Advanced Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the
machine correctly, perform routine maintenance and take a simple
troubleshooting action as necessary, so that you can always use the
machine in good condition.
Please read this Advanced Operation Guide before you start using the
machine, and keep it close to the machine for easy reference.

Legal and Safety Information
Please read this information before using your machine. This
chapter provides information on the following topics.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

•

Legal Information..............................................................ii

•

Regarding Trade Names ................................................. iii

Legal and Safety Information

Legal Information
Copying or other reproduction of all or part of this guide without the prior
written consent of Kyocera Mita Corporation is prohibited.

Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning

•

It may be prohibited to copy/scan copyrighted material without
permission of the copyright owner.

•

It is prohibited under any circumstances to copy/scan domestic or
foreign currencies.

•

Local laws and regulations may prohibit or restrict copying/scanning of
other items not mentioned above.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Legal and Safety Information

Regarding Trade Names

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

•

KPDL is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation.

•

Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, Windows NT and Internet Explorer are
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and/or
other countries.

•

Windows Me, Window XP and Windows Vista are trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation.

•

PCL is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.

•

Adobe Acrobat, Adobe Reader and PostScript are trademarks of
Adobe Systems, Incorporated.

•

Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.

•

Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc.

•

Centronics is a trademark of Centronics Data Computer Corporation.

•

IBM and IBM PC/AT are trademarks of International Business
Machines Corporation.

•

Power PC is a trademark of IBM in the U.S.A. and/or other countries.

•

AppleTalk is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.

•

CompactFlash and CF are trademarks of SanDisk, Inc.

•

PC-PR201/65A is a product of NEC Corporation.

•

VP-1000 is a product of Seiko Epson Corporation.

•

This machine has been developed using embedded real-time
operating system Tornado™ by Wind River Systems, Inc.

•

PCL6, a command language of HP LaserJet emulated by this
machine, is using the compatible system PeerelessPrintXL developed
by Peerless Systems Corporation. PeerelessPrintXL is a trademark of
Peerless Systems Corporation (2381 Rosecrans Ave. ElSegundo, CA
90245, U.S.A.).

•

TrueType is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.

•

Heisei fonts have been developed by the working groups in
collaboration with the Japanese Standards Association. Reproduction
of these fonts without permission is prohibited.

•

TypeBankG-B, TypeBankM-M and Typebank-OCR are trademarks of
TypeBank®.

•

All European language fonts installed in this machine are used under
licensing agreement with Monotype Imaging Inc.

•

Helvetica, Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of LinotypeHell AG.

•

ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC Bookman, ITC ZapfChancery and ITC
ZapfDingbats are registered trademarks of International Type-face
Corporation.

•

UFST™ MicroType® fonts by Monotype Imaging Inc. are installed in
this machine.

•

This machine contains the NF module developed by ACCESS Co.,
Ltd.

iii

Legal and Safety Information
•

This machine contains the software having modules developed by
Independent JPEG Group.

All other brands and product names are registered trademarks or
trademarks of their respective companies. The designations ™ and ® will
not be used in this Operation Guide.

GPL
Firmware of this machine is using in part the GPL applied codes
(www.fsf.org/copyleft/gpl.html). Please access /www.kyoceramita.com/gpl
for more information on how to make GPL applied codes available.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

About this Operation Guide
This Operation Guide contains the following chapters.
1

Copying Functions

Describes the functions you can use when copying.
2

Sending Functions

Describes the functions you can use when sending originals.
3

Printer

Explains how to connect to a computer via this machine's parallel interface
or serial interface (optional) and how to specify the settings for using the
machine's printer function.
4

Using Document Box

Describes some typical ways of using the Document Box.
5

Status/Job Cancel

Explains how to check the job status and job history and how to cancel jobs
being printed or waiting to print.
Also explains how to check the remaining paper and device status and how
to cancel fax transmission.
6

System Menu

Describes the System Menu options for general machine operation.
7

Management

Explains user login administration and job accounting.
Also describes the procedure for Security Kit installation.
8

Security

Describes the procedures for correctly installing and running the optional
Security Kit and provides precautionary notes.
Appendix
Provides information on media types and paper sizes. Also includes a
glossary of terms.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Included Guides
The following guides are supplied with the machine. Refer to them as
necessary.
Operation Guide
Describes how to load paper, basic copy, print and scan operations, and
troubleshooting.
Advanced Operation Guide (This Guide)
Explains copying, printing and scanning features in depth, as well as
default settings.

Conventions in This Guide
The following conventions are used depending on the nature of the
description.
Convention

Example

Bold

Indicates the operation panel
key or a computer screen.

Press the Start key.

[Regular]

Indicates the touch panel keys.

Press [OK].

Italic

Indicates the message
displayed on the touch panel.

Ready to copy is displayed.

Used to emphasize a key word,
phrase or references to
additional information.

For more information refer to Sleep and
Auto Sleep on page 3-4.

Note

Indicates supplemental
information or operations for
reference.

NOTE:

Important

Indicates items that are required
or prohibited so as to avoid
problems.

IMPORTANT:

Indicates what must be
observed to prevent injury or
machine breakdown and how to
deal with it.

CAUTION:

Caution

Description

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Description of Operation Procedure
In this Operation Guide, continuous operation of the keys on the touch
panel is as follows:
Actual procedure
Press [Copy].
T
Press [Next] of Quick Setup.
T
Press [T] twice.
T
Press [Change] of Original Image.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Description in this
Operation Guide
Press [Copy], [Next] of Quick
Setup, [T] twice, and then
[Change] of Original Image.

vii

Originals and Paper Sizes
This section explains the notation used in this guide when referring to sizes
of originals or paper sizes.
As in A4, B5 and Letter, which may be used either in the horizontal or
vertical direction, horizontal direction is indicated by an additional R
character in order to indicate the orientation of the original/paper.
Set direction

Indicated size *

Vertical direction

A4, B5, A5, B6,
A6, 16K, Letter,
Statement

Original

Paper

For original/paper, dimension A is longer than B.
Horizontal direction

B
A

A4-R, B5-R, A5-R,
B6-R, A6-R, 16KR, Letter-R,
Statement-R

Original

Paper

For original/paper, dimension A is shorter than B.
*

The size of original/paper that can be used depends on the function
and source tray. For further details, refer to the page detailing that
function or source tray.

Icons on the Touch Panel
The following icons are used to indicate originals and paper set directions
on the touch panel.
Set direction

Originals

Paper

Vertical direction

Horizontal direction

viii

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Contents

Contents
Legal and Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
About this Operation Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
1

Copying Functions
Original Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Paper Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Mixed Sized Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Original Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Collate/Offset Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Staple/Punch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Output Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Zoom Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Combine Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Margin/Centering Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Border Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Booklet from Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Duplex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Cover Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
Form Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
Page Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
Memo Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
Density Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44
Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45
EcoPrint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46
Continuous Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47
Auto Image Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49
Negative Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
Mirror Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51
Job Finish Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
File Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-54
Priority Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55
Multi-Page Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56
Repeat Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57
Programmed Copying (Copying and Sending) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-59
Registering Shortcuts (Copying and Sending) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-61

Sending Functions
Original Size Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Sending Size Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Centering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Mixed Sized Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
1-sided/2-sided Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Original Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
PDF Encryption Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
File Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Scan Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Contents
Scan Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Sharpness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Background Density Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Color / Grayscale / Monochrome Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Multi-page Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Continuous Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Border Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Enter Document Name/File Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Enter E-mail Subject and Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Finish Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Send and Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Send and Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
3

Printer
Parallel Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Serial Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Setting of Other Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Using Document Box
What is Document Box? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Basic Operation for Document Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Using a Job Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

Status / Job Cancel
Checking Job Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Checking Job History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Pause and Resumption of Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Canceling of Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Priority Override for Waiting Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Reordering Print Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Device/Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

System Menu
Return to Top on the System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Copy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Sending Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Document Box/Removable Memory Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Network Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Printing Reports/Sending Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
Adjustment/Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
Date/Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70
Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One-Touch Keys) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
System Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85
Restarting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86
SSL Network Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87
Accessibility (Enlarged Touch Panel Display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88

Management
User Login Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Job Accounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Contents
Security Kit Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
8

Security
Security Kit Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Touch Panel Display after the Security Kit is Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Installing the Security Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Changing Security Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
System Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Warning Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Appendix
Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-2
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-10
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Index-1

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Contents

xii

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

1 Copying Functions
This chapter explains the functions available for copying.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Original Size ................................................................. 1-2
Paper Selection ............................................................ 1-4
Mixed Sized Originals................................................... 1-7
Original Orientation .................................................... 1-10
Collate/Offset Copying ............................................... 1-12
Staple/Punch .............................................................. 1-14
Output Destination...................................................... 1-17
Zoom Mode ................................................................ 1-19
Combine Mode ........................................................... 1-22
Margin/Centering Mode.............................................. 1-25
Border Erase .............................................................. 1-27
Booklet from Sheets ................................................... 1-30
Duplex ........................................................................ 1-33
Cover Mode................................................................ 1-37
Form Overlay.............................................................. 1-38
Page Numbering ........................................................ 1-40
Memo Mode ............................................................... 1-42
Density Adjustment .................................................... 1-44
Image Quality ............................................................. 1-45
EcoPrint...................................................................... 1-46
Continuous Scan ........................................................ 1-47
Auto Image Rotation................................................... 1-49
Negative Image .......................................................... 1-50
Mirror Image ............................................................... 1-51
Job Finish Notice........................................................ 1-52
File Name ................................................................... 1-54
Priority Override ......................................................... 1-55
Multi-Page Forms ....................................................... 1-56
Repeat Copy .............................................................. 1-57
Programmed Copying (Copying and Sending)........... 1-59
Registering Shortcuts (Copying and Sending) ........... 1-61

1-1

Copying Functions

Original Size
Specify the size of originals being scanned. Be sure to specify the original
size when copying non-standard sizes.
The following options are available.
Item

How to Select

Sizes

Have the size of
original detected
automatically, or
select from the
standard sizes.

Inch models: Auto, Ledger, Legal,
Letter, Letter-R, Statement,
Statement-R, 8.5×13.5", Oficio II and
11×15"

Select from the
standard sizes
not included in
the Standard
Sizes 1 .

Inch models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5,
B5-R, A5, A5-R, B6, B6-R, A6-R,
Folio, 8K, 16K and 16K-R

Others

Select from
envelope,
postcard or the
custom sized
originals*.

Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, Custom 1 to
4

Size Entry

Enter the size
not included in
the standard
sizes 1 and 2**.

Inch models
Horizontal: 2 to 17" (in 0.01"
increments), Vertical: 2 to 11.69" (in
0.01" increments)

Standard
Sizes 1

Standard
Sizes 2

Metric models: Auto, A3, B4, A4,
A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5, A5-R, B6, B6-R,
A6-R and Folio

Metric models: Ledger, Legal, Letter,
Letter-R, Statement, Statement-R,
8.5×13.5", Oficio II, 11×15", 8K, 16K
and 16K-R

Metric models
Horizontal: 50 to 432 mm (in 1 mm
increments), Vertical: 50 to 297 mm
(in 1 mm increments)
*
**

For instructions on how to register custom original sizes
(Custom 1 to 4), refer to Custom Original Size Setup on page
6-6.
The input units can be changed in the System menu.
Refer to Switching Unit of Measurement on page 6-17.

Use the procedure below to select the original size.

1-2

Place the originals on the platen.

Press the Copy key.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Copying Functions

Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Original Size].

Press [Standard
Sizes 1 ], [Standard
Sizes 2 ], [Others] or
[Size Entry] to select
the original size.

Ready to copy.

Copies

Press [OK] to display
the image.

Original : - - : 100%
Zoom
: --Send

Standard
Sizes 1

Auto

Ledger

Letter

Standard
Sizes 2

Letter

Legal

Statement

Executive

11x15"

8.5x13.5"

Others

OficioII

Size Entry

Add Shortcut

Cancel

Status

If [Size Entry] is
selected, press [+]
or [-] to specify the
horizontal size (X)
and the vertical size
(Y). Press [# Keys]
to enter the size
directly using the
numeric keys.

Original Size

OK
10/5/2006

Ready to copy.

Copies

10:10

Original Size
Standard
Sizes 1
Press [OK] to display
the image.

11.00 "

Standard
Sizes 2
# Keys

Others
Y

Original : - - : 100%
Zoom
Send
: ---

(2.00 - 17.00)

Size Entry

(2.00 - 11.69)
8.50 "

# Keys
Add Shortcut
Status

Press [OK].

Press the Start key to start copying.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Cancel

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

1-3

Copying Functions

Paper Selection
Select the paper source that contains the required paper size.

NOTE: Specify in advance the size and type of the paper loaded in the
cassette (refer to Original/Paper Setup on page 6-6).

Selecting the Cassette
Use the procedure below to select the paper supply cassette.

Place the originals on the platen.

Press the Copy key.

Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Paper Selection].

Press the key of the paper source corresponding to the required paper
size. The cassette in which the paper is loaded is selected.
If [Auto] is selected,
the paper matching
the size of the
original is selected
automatically.

Ready to copy.

Copies

Paper Selection

Auto

Press [OK] to display
the image.

Original : - - : 100%
Zoom
: --Send

Letter
Plain

Ledger
Plain

MP Tray
Setting

Letter
Plain
Letter
Plain
Add Shortcut

Status

1-4

Press [OK].

Press the Start key to start copying.

Cancel

OK
10/5/200 6

10:10

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Copying Functions

Reserving the Multi Purpose Tray
Change the paper size and media type.
The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below.
Category
Paper
Size

Item
Standard
Sizes 1

How to
Select
Choose from
the standard
size.

Sizes
Inch models: Ledger, Legal,
Letter, Letter-R, Statement,
8.5×13.5", Oficio II and
Executive
Metric models: A3, B4, A4,
A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, B6,
B6-R, A6-R and Folio

Standard
Sizes 2

Media
Type
*

**
***

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Choose from
the standard
sizes not
included in
the Standard
Sizes 1.

Inch models: A3, B4, A4,
A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, B6-R,
A6-R, Folio, 8K, 16K and
16K-R

Others

Choose from
nonstandard
sizes and
custom
sizes.

ISO B5, Envelope #10,
Envelope #9, Envelope #6,
Envelope Monarch, Envelope
DL, Envelope C5, Envelope
C4, Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki,
Youkei 4, Youkei 2 and
Custom 1 to 4*

Size
Entry

Enter the
size not
included in
the standard
sizes 1 and
2**.

Inch models
Horizontal: 5.83 to 17" (in 0.01"
increments), Vertical: 3.86 to
11.69" (in 0.01" increments)

Metric models: Ledger, Legal,
Letter, Letter-R, Statement,
8.5×13.5", Oficio II, Executive,
8K, 16K and 16K-R

Metric models
Vertical: 98 to 297 mm (in 1 mm
increments), Horizontal: 148 to
432 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Plain, Transparency, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled,
Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched,
Letterhead, Thick, Envelope, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8***
For instructions on how to specify the custom paper sizes (Custom 1
to 4), refer to Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to
Print on page 6-6.
The input units can be changed in the System menu.
Refer to Switching Unit of Measurement on page 6-17.
For instructions on how to select custom paper types 1 to 8, refer to
Paper Weight on page 6-10.

1-5

Copying Functions

NOTE: You can conveniently select in advance the size and type of
paper that will be used often and set them as default (refer to Paper Size
and Media Type Setup for Multi Purpose Tray on page 6-9).
Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type.

Place the originals on the platen.

Press the Copy key.

Press [Org./Paper/Finishing], [Paper Selection] and then [MP Tray
Setting].

Press [Standard
Sizes 1 ], [Standard
Sizes 2 ], [Others] or
[Size Entry] to select
the paper size.

Ready to copy.

Copies

Paper Selection - MP Tray Setting
Standard
Sizes 1
Standard
Sizes 2
Others

Ledger

Letter

Legal

Statement

Executive

8.5x13.5"

OficioII

Size Entry
Plain
Media Type

OK
Status

If you select [Size
Entry], press [+] or [–
] to specify X
(horizontal) and Y
(vertical) sizes. You
can enter the size
directly using the
numeric keys after
pressing [# Keys].

10/5/2006

Ready to copy.

10:10

Copies

Paper Selection
Standard
Sizes 1

(3.86 - 11.69)

11.00

Standard
Sizes 2
# Keys

Others
Y
Size Entry

(5.83 - 17.00)

8.50

"
Plain

# Keys

Media Type

OK
Status

Press [Media Type].

Press [Media Type] to select paper type, and press [OK].

Press [OK].

Press the Start key to start scanning the originals.

1-6

10/5/2006

10:10

When the machine is ready the confirmation screen for the specified paper
appears. Load the required paper in the Multi Purpose tray and press
[Continue] to start copying.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Copying Functions

Mixed Sized Originals
Using the optional document processor, the originals of different sizes can
be loaded in a batch and copied. In this operation, up to 30 originals of
different sizes can be placed in the document processor at the same time.

Supported Combinations of Originals
Originals of the Same Width
The supported combinations of originals are as follows.
Ledger and Letter (A3 and A4)

Ledger

Letter

Ledger

Ledger and Letter-R (Folio and A4-R)

Legal

Letter-R

Letter-R
Legal

B4 and B5

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

1-7

Copying Functions
Originals of Different Widths
Place all originals of different widths. The supported combinations of
originals are as follows.

NOTE: When mixing the original sizes as using the following
combination: Folio, A4-R, and B5-R, make sure to set System Menu
->Common Settings -> Original / Paper Setup -> Original Auto Detect to
[On] for [Folio]. For more information, refer to Automatic Detection of
Originals on page 6-13.
A3, B4, A4 and B5

B4, A4-R and B5

Folio, A4-R and B5-R

1-8

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Copying Functions

Selecting How to Copy Originals
Select whether you wish to create individual copies on different size papers
matching the original sizes or to produce all copies on the same size
papers.

NOTE: This function is available regardless of whether originals have the
same width or not.
The table below shows the finished document sizes for the different
original size options.
Option

Description

Mixed Sized
Copies

Originals are detected individually for size and
copied to the same size papers as originals.

Same Size Copies

Originals are all copied to the same size papers.

Use the procedure below to copy mixed sized originals.

Place originals on the document processor.
IMPORTANT: When placing originals of different widths, be sure to flush
them against the document width guide toward the back of the machine.

Press the Copy key.

Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Mixed Sized Originals].

Select [Mixed Sized
Copies] or [Same
Size Copies] as
finish size.

Ready to copy.

Copies

Mixed Sized Originals
Original Direction

Off

Press [OK] to display
the image.

Mixed Sized
Copies

Same Width

Diff Width

Same Sized
Copies
Top Page Direction

Long Edge
Left

Add Shortcut
Status

Short Edge
Left

Cancel

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Select the combination of originals from [Same Width] and [Diff Width].
When [Same Size Copies] is selected, select [Long Edge Left] or [Short
Edge Left] as the first original orientation.

Press [OK].

Press the Start key to start copying.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

1-9

Copying Functions

Original Orientation
Select the original orientation to use the following functions.
•

Duplex

•

Margin/Centering originals

•

Border erase

•

Combine mode

•

Memo mode

•

Page numbering

•

Booklets

•

Stapling/Punching (optional feature)

If [On] is selected as the Orientation Confirmation setting in the
System Menu, the selection screen for original orientation appears
when you select any of the above functions.

When placing originals on the platen

Original

[Top Edge Top]

[Top Edge Left]

When placing originals on the optional document processor

Original

[Top Edge Top]

[Top Edge Left]

NOTE: To change the default setting for the original orientation, refer to
Original Orientation on page 6-21.

1-10

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Copying Functions
Use the procedure below to select the orientation when placing the
originals on the platen.

Place the originals on the platen.

Press the Copy key.

Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Original Orientation].

Select [Top Edge
Top] or [Top Edge
Left] as the way the
original is oriented.

Ready to copy.

Copies

Original Orientation
Enter the orientation of the
original document's top edge.
Press [OK] to display
the image.

Top Edge Top

Add Shortcut
Status

Press [OK].

Press the Start key to start copying.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Top Edge Left

Cancel

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

1-11

Copying Functions

Collate/Offset Copying
The machine can collate and offset at the same time as it copies.
You can use the Collate/Offset copy function for tasks such as those
shown below.
Collate
Scan multiple originals and
deliver complete sets of copies
as required according to page
number.

3
2
1

3
3
2

2
1

3
2
1

Original

Copy

Offset
Use offset to produce copies
after rotating each set (or
page) by 90º.

3
2
1
3

2
1

3
2
1

Original

Copy

NOTE: To use the offset function, load the same sized paper with
different orientation in the paper source other than the selected paper
source.
The paper sizes supported in Offset are A4, B5, Letter and 16K.
The procedure for using collate/offset copying is explained below.

Press [Org./Paper/
Finishing] and then
[Collate/Offset].

Ready to copy.

Copies

Copy Image
Original
Size

Paper
Selection

Mixed Sized
Originals

Collate/
Offset

Staple

Output Tray

Original
Orientation

Set Original.

Original : - - Zoom
: 100%
Paper
: --Preview
Quick Setup
Status

1-12

Org./Paper/
Finishing

Image
Quality

Layout/Edit

Advanced
Setup
10/5/200 6

10:10

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Copying Functions

To use collate
copying, press [On]
of Collate.

Ready to copy.

Copies

Collate/Offset
Collate

To use offset
copying, press
[Each Set] of Offset.

Press [OK] to display

Off

Each Set

the image.

Offset

Press [OK].
Add Shortcut

Cancel

Status

If [Off] is selected for
Collate, press [Off]
or [Each Page] in
Offset.

OK
10/5/2006

Ready to copy.

Copies

10:10

Collate/Offset
Collate
Press [OK] to display

Off

Each Page

the image.

Offset

Add Shortcut

Cancel

Status

Press [OK].

Use the numeric keys to enter the copy quantity.

Place the originals and press the Start key. Copying begins.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

1-13

Copying Functions

Staple/Punch
Use this feature to staple or hole-punch your finished copies.

NOTE: Stapling requires the optional document finisher, built-in finisher
or 3000-sheet document finisher.
Punching requires the optional 3000 Sheet Document Finisher and the
optional punching unit.
The following stapling options and orientations are available.
Original

Copy

Orientation of Original
Platen

Document processor

1 staple

2 staple

* 2 staples at the top are only available
when Auto Image Rotation is set.

2 staple

1 staple

2 staple

1-14

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Copying Functions
The following punch options and orientations are available.
Original

Copy

Orientation of Original
Platen

Document processor

* Punches at the top are only
available when Auto Image
Rotation is set.

Use the procedure below to produce stapled or punched copies.

Press the Copy key.

Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Staple/Punch].

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

1-15

Copying Functions

To staple, select the
staple position, [1
staple] or [2 staples],
under Staple.

Ready to copy.

Copies

Staple
Press [OK] to display
the image.

Off

Upper
Left

1 staple

Upper
Right

2 staples
Punch

Off
2 holes

Top Edge Top

3 holes

Original
Orientation

Add Shortcut

Cancel

Status

To punch, select the
punch position, [2
holes] or [3 holes] ([4
holes]), under
Punch.

OK
10/5/2006

Ready to copy.

10:10

Copies

Staple/Punch
Staple

Off
1 staple

Press [OK] to display
the image.

2 staples
Punch

Off
2 holes
3 holes
Add Shortcut

Status

1-16

Staple/Punch

Left
Top
Right

Cancel

Top Edge Top
Original
Orientation
OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [Original Orientation] to choose orientation of the originals, either
[Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge Left]. Then press [OK].

Press [OK].

Place the originals on the platen and press the Start key. Copying begins.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Copying Functions

Output Destination
You can use the procedure below to select an output destination such as
the optional document finisher for your copies.

NOTE: Optional output destinations include the job separator, document
finisher, 3000 Sheet Document Finisher and the mailbox.
The table below shows the available output destinations.
Destination

Description

Top tray

Top tray of the machine (where copies are
stored)

Finisher tray*

Tray of the optional document finisher or built-in
finisher

Tray A, Tray B*,
Tray C*

Tray A to C of the optional 3000 Sheet
Document Finisher

Job separator tray

Optional job separator

Trays 1 to 7*

Trays 1 to 7 of the optional mailbox (Tray 1 is the
top tray)

Copy output orientation can be selected either as face-up (print
facing up) or face-down (print facing down).

NOTE: To change default destination for copies, refer to Output Tray on
page 6-20 for details.
Use the procedure below to select the output destination.

Press the Copy key.

Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Output Tray].

Select the output destination for finished copies.
When you select any
of [Finisher tray],
[Tray B], [Tray C] or
[Trays 1 to 7], select
the orientation of
output copy, Face
Up (print facing up)
or Face Down (print
facing down).

Ready to copy.

Copies

Face Up
Press [OK] to display

Face Down

the image.
Top Tray

Tray A

Tray B

Tray C

Job Separator
Tray

Tray 1

Tray 2

Tray 3

Tray 4

Tray 5

Tray 6

Tray 7

Add Shortcut
Status

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Output Tray

Cancel

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

1-17

Copying Functions

1-18

Press [OK].

Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen. Press the
Start key to start copying.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Copying Functions

Zoom Mode
Original image can be reduced or enlarged for copying. The following
zoom modes are available.

Auto Zoom
Automatically reduces or enlarges the original image suited to the selected
paper size.
Ledger: 129 %
Letter-R

A3: 141 %
Statement-R: 64 %

A5: 70 %

Manual Zoom
Enter desired magnification in 1% increments between 25% and 400%.
25 %

400 %

Preset Zoom
Reduces or enlarges at preset magnifications.
The available magnifications and the sizes before and after copying
(original size -> paper size) are as follows:
Model

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Zoom Level (OriginalCopy)

Inch Models

100%, Auto, 400% (Max.), 200% (STMT -> Ledger),
154% (STMT -> Legal), 129% (Letter -> Ledger),
121% (Legal -> Ledger), 78% (Legal -> Letter),
77% (Ledger -> Legal), 64% (Ledger -> Letter),
50% (Ledger -> STMT), 25% (Min.)

Metric Models

100%, Auto, 400% (Max.), 200% (A5 -> A3),
141% (A4 -> A3, A5 -> A4), 127% (Folio -> A3),
106% (11×15" -> A3), 90% (Folio -> A4),
75% (11×15" -> A4), 70% (A3 -> A4, A4 -> A5),
50%, 25% (Min.)

Metric Models
(Asia Pacific)

100%, Auto, 400% (Max.), 200% (A5 -> A3),
141% (A4 -> A3, B5 -> B4), 122% (A4 -> B4, A5 -> B5),
115% (B4 -> A3, B5 -> A4), 86% (A3 -> B4, A4 -> B5),
81% (B4 -> A4, B5 -> A5), 70% (A3 -> A4, B4 -> B5),
50%, 25% (Min.)

1-19

Copying Functions

XY Zoom
Adjust vertical and horizontal magnifications independently. Enter desired
magnification in 1% increments between 25% and 400%.
*

When using the document processor, enter the desired magnification
in 1% increments between 25% and 200%.

The procedure for using zoom copying is explained below.

Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen.

Press the Copy key.

Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Zoom].

Press [Auto] to use Auto Zoom.
Press [+] or [–] to change the displayed magnification as desired. You can
also enter the magnification directly using the numeric keys by pressing [#
Keys].
To use Preset
Zoom, select the key
of desired
magnification.

Ready to copy.

Copies

Standard
Zoom
Press [OK] to display
the image.

XY Zoom

(25 - 400)

400%

STMT
154%
>>Legal
Letter
129%
>>Ledger

Add Shortcut
Status

Max.

STMT
200%
>>Ledger

121%

1-20

Zoom

78%

Legal
>>Letter

# Keys

77%

Ledger
>>Legal

100%

64%

Ledger
>>Letter

Auto

50%

Ledger
>>STMT

Legal
>>Ledger

25%
Cancel

Min.

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Copying Functions
To use XY Zoom,
press [XY Zoom].

Ready to copy.

Copies

Zoom

Press [+] or [–] to
change the
displayed
magnifications of X
(horizontal) and Y
(vertical). You can
also enter the
magnification
directly using the
numeric keys by
pressing [# Keys].

Standard
Zoom
Press [OK] to display

(25 - 400)
%

XY Zoom

the image.

# Keys
Y

(25 - 400)
%
Top Edge Top
Original
Orientation

# Keys
Add Shortcut
Status

Cancel

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [Original Orientation] to choose orientation of the originals, either
[Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge Left]. Then press [OK].

Press [OK].

Press the Start key to start copying.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

1-21

Copying Functions

Combine Mode
This mode allows you to copy 2 or 4 originals combined onto a single page.
2-in-1 mode or 4-in-1 mode. The page boundary of each original can be
indicated.

NOTE: Combine mode is available for the copy paper sizes of A3, B4,
Folio, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 8.5×13.5",
Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, 8K, 16K and 16K-R.

2-in-1 Mode
For copying two originals onto a single sheet. This mode can be used with
Duplex mode to copy four originals onto one sheet.
The following 2-in-1 options and output orientations are available.
Original

Copy

Orientation of Original
Platen

Document processor

NOTE: When placing the original on the platen, be sure to copy the
originals in page order.

4-in-1 Mode
For copying four originals onto a single sheet. This mode can be used with
Duplex mode to copy eight originals onto one sheet.

1-22

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Copying Functions
The following 4-in-1 options and output orientations are available.
Original

Copy

Orientation of Original
Platen

Document processor

NOTE: When placing the original on the platen, be sure to copy the
originals in page order.

Types of Page Boundary Lines
The following types of the boundary lines are available.

None

Solid

Dotted

Borders
(Cropmark)

The procedure for using Combine mode copying is explained below.

Press the Copy key.

Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Combine].

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

1-23

Copying Functions

Press [2 in 1] or [4 in
1], and choose the
page layout of
Layout.

Ready to copy.

Copies

Combine
Layout

Off

Press [OK] to display
the image.

2 in 1
Right then
Down

4 in 1

Left then
Down

None
Border Line

Down then
Right

Add Shortcut

Down then
Left

Cancel

Status

Top Edge Top
Original
Orientation
OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [Border Line] to choose the type of the lines to indicate page
boundaries. Press [OK].

Press [Original Orientation] to choose orientation of the originals, either
[Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge Left]. Then press [OK].

Press [OK].

Place the originals and press the Start key.
If the original is placed on the platen, replace the original and press the
Start key.
After scanning all originals, press [Scan finish] to start copying.

1-24

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Copying Functions

Margin/Centering Mode
Shift the original image to make space on the copy for binding on the left
(right) or top (bottom) side.
When you copy onto paper different from the original size, you can center
the original image on the paper.
The following margin widths are available.
Input units

Margin Width

Inch Models

-0.75 to 0.75" (in 0.01" increments)

Metric Models

-18 mm to 18 mm (in 1-mm increments)

Margin on the Back Side
When duplex copying, you can also specify the margin on the back side.
Auto
When [Auto] is selected, an appropriate margin is applied automatically on
the rear page depending on a margin specified for the front page and a
binding orientation.
Separate Front/Back Margins
Enables you to specify the front and back settings separately.

NOTE: You can set the default margin width. Refer to Margin Default on
page 6-30 for details.
Use the procedure below to make copies with margins.

Place the originals on the platen.

Press the Copy key.

Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Margin/Centering].

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

1-25

Copying Functions

Press [Margin] to select the copy with margin.
Use [+] or [–] to enter the margins for Left/Right and Top/Bottom. Press [#
Keys] to use the numeric keys for entry.
For duplex copying,
press [Back Page
Margin] and select
[Auto] or [Manual].

Ready to copy.

Copies

Margin/Centering
Left/Right

Off

(-0.75 - +0.75)

0.00

Margin

Press [OK] to display
the image.

Centering

Auto

# Keys
Top/Bottom

(-0.75 - +0.75)

0.00

Back Page
Margin

"
Top Edge Top
Original
Orientation

# Keys
Add Shortcut

Cancel

Status

If you selected
[Auto], press [OK]. If
you pressed
[Manual], enter the
margins in the
displayed screen
and then press [OK].

10/5/2006

Ready to copy.

10:10

Copies

Margin/Centering - Back Page Margin
Left/Right

Auto

Press [OK] to display

(-0.75 - +0.75)

0.00

Manual

the image.

# Keys
Top/Bottom

(-0.75 - +0.75)

0.00

# Keys
Add Shortcut

Cancel

Status

Press [Centering] to
center the original
image on the paper.

OK
10/5/2006

Ready to copy.

10:10

Copies

Margin/Centering
Off

Press [OK] to display
the image.

Margin
Centering

Top Edge Top
Original
Orientation
Add Shortcut
Status

1-26

Cancel

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [Original Orientation] to choose orientation of the originals, either
[Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge Left]. Then press [OK].

Press [OK].

Press the Start key to start copying.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Copying Functions

Border Erase
Use Border Erase to remove black shadows that appear around the
outside of the original when making copies. The following options can be
selected.

Border Erase Sheet
Erases black borders around the single sheet original.

Original

Copy

Border Erase Book
Erases black borders around the edges and in the middle of the original
such as a thick book. You can specify the widths individually to erase the
borders around the edges and in the center of the book.

Original

Copy

Individual Border Erase
Specify border erase widths individually for all edges.

Original

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Copy

1-27

Copying Functions
In each option, the available ranges are as below.
Input units

Border Erase Range

Inch Models

0 to 2"(in 0.01" increments)

Metric Models

0 mm to 50 mm (in 1-mm increments)

NOTE: To specify the default width value of Border Erase, refer to Border
Erase Default on page 6-29 for details.
Use the procedure below to erase borders when copying.

Place the originals on the platen.

Press the Copy key.

Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Border Erase].

Select [Border Erase Sheet] to erase borders for an individual sheet or
[Border Erase Book] to erase borders for a book.
Use [+] or [–] to enter
the width in Border
or Gutter. Press [#
Keys] to use the
numeric keys for
entry.

Ready to copy.

Copies

Border Erase
Border

Off

(0.00 - 2.00)

0.00

Border Erase
Sheet

Press [OK] to display
the image.

# Keys

Border Erase
Book
Gutter

(0.00 - 2.00)

Individual
Border Erase

0.00

# Keys
Add Shortcut

Cancel

Status

Press [Individual
Border Erase] to
select the individual
border erase.

10/5/2006

Ready to copy.

Copies

Border Erase
(0.00 - 2.00)

Off

Press [OK] to display

Use [+] or [–] to enter
the width in Top,
Bottom, Left or
Right. Press [#
Keys] to use the
numeric keys for
entry.

10:10

the image.

Top

0.00

Border Erase
Sheet

Bottom

0.00

Border Erase
Book

Left

0.00

Individual
Border Erase

Right

Top Edge Top
# Keys

Add Shortcut
Status

Original
Orientation
Cancel

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [Original Orientation] to select the original orientation from either
[Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge Left]. Then press [OK].

5
1-28

Press [OK].

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Copying Functions

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Press the Start key to start copying.

1-29

Copying Functions

Booklet from Sheets
The Booklet copying option allows you to copy sheet originals and produce
booklets such as small brochures or pamphlets. A booklet, such as a
magazine, is made by folding at the center.
You can copy the cover page onto colored paper or thick paper. Paper for
the cover is supplied from the Multi Purpose tray. To feed the cover paper
from the cassette, refer to Paper Source for Cover Paper on page 6-15.
The supported original and paper sizes are as follows.
Type of
Original

Center Binding
And Folding
Option*

Original Size

Paper Size

Onesided
original,
Twosided
original

Not available

All**

A3, B4, A4, A4-R,
B5, B5-R, A5,
A5-R, Ledger,
Legal, Letter and
Letter-R

Available

All**

A3, B4, A4-R,
Ledger, Legal and
Letter-R

Book
original

Not available

A3, B4, A4-R, B5R, A5-R, Ledger,
Letter-R and 8K

A4, A4-R, B5,
B5-R, Letter and
Letter-R

Available

A3, B4, A4-R, B5R, A5-R, Ledger
and Letter-R

A4-R and Letter-R

Capability of stapling finished copies in the center and automatically
folding them in the center. Optional 3000 Sheet Document
Finisher and the center folding unit are required.
Except for custom sized originals.

For binding on the left side
The folded copies can be read from left to right.

Original

1-30

Copy

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Copying Functions

For binding on the right side
The folded copies can be read from right to left.

Original

Copy

For top binding
The folded copies can be read from top to bottom.

Original

Copy

The procedure for using Booklet copying is explained below.

Press the Copy key.

Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Booklet].

Press [1-sided >> Booklet] to produce a booklet from single-sided
originals.
Press [2-sided >> Booklet] to produce a booklet from two-sided originals.
Press [Book >>
Booklet] to produce
a booklet from an
open book original.

Ready to copy.

Copies

Original

Off

Press [OK] to display
the image.

Binding
Left/Right

1-sided
>>Booklet
2-sided
>>Booklet

Add Shortcut

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Cover

Finishing
Binding
Left
Binding
Right
Binding
Top

Status

Cover

Binding
Top/Bottom

Book
>>Booklet

Booklet

Cancel

Top Edge Top
Original
Orientation
OK
10/5/2006

10:10

If you selected [2-sided >> Booklet] or [Book >> Booklet], choose the
binding orientation in Finishing.

1-31

Copying Functions
If you selected [1-sided >> Booklet], choose the binding orientation in
Finishing.

If you choose [1-sided >> Booklet] or [2-sided >> Booklet], you can add the
cover. Press [Cover], select [Cover] and press [OK].

If the optional 3000 Sheet Document Finisher and the center folding unit
are installed, [Bind and Fold]* can be selected. Press [Saddle Stitch] and
select [Bind and Fold]. Press [OK]. Up to 16 sheets (64 pages) can be
bound with center margin stapling and center folding.
*

Capability of stapling finished copies in the center and automatically
folding them in the center.

Press [Original Orientation] to choose orientation of the originals, either
[Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge Left]. Then press [OK].

Press [OK].

Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen and press
the Start key.

NOTE: When using the platen, be sure to place the originals in page
order.
If the originals are placed on the platen, consecutively replace each
original after pressing the Start key.
After scanning all originals, press [Scan finish] to start copying.

1-32

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Copying Functions

Duplex
Use Duplex to create two-sided copies.
You can also create single-sided copies from two-sided originals or
originals with facing pages such as books. The following modes are
available.

NOTE: To scan 2-sided originals in color using the optional document
processor, expansion of the memory in the machine is required. Call
service.

One-sided to Two-sided
Produces two-sided copies from one-sided originals. In case the originals
are an odd number, the back side of the last copy will be blank.

5
4

5
3

4
1

Original

Copy

The following binding options are available.
A Original Left/Right Binding >> Copy Left/Right Binding: Images are
copied onto the back side without being rotated.
B Original Left/Right Binding >> Copy Top Binding: Images are copied
onto the back side after being rotated 180°. When copies are bound on
top, the facing pages look in the same orientation.

abc

ghi

B
ghi

abc

def

ghi
def

def

Original

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Copy

1-33

Copying Functions

Two-sided to One-sided
Copies each side of a two-sided original onto two individual sheets.
Optional document processor is required.

Original

Copy

The following binding options are available.
Left/Right Binding: Images are copied onto the back side without being
rotated.
Top Binding: Images are copied onto the back side after being rotated
180°.

Two-sided to Two-sided
Produces two-sided copies from two-sided originals. Optional document
processor is required.

4
1

Original

Copy

NOTE: The paper sizes supported in Two-sided to Two-sided mode are
Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Statement, Oficio II, 8.5×13.5", A3, B4, A4,
A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R and Folio.

1-34

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Copying Functions

Book to One-sided
Copies each page of originals with facing pages onto two individual sheets.

Original

Copy

The following binding options are available.
Left Binding: Originals with facing pages are copied from left to right.
Right Binding: Originals with facing pages are copied from right to left.

NOTE: The following sizes of originals and paper are supported in Book
to One-sided mode. Original: Ledger, Letter-R, A3, B4, A4-R, B5-R, A5-R
and 8K. Paper: Letter, A4 and B5. When you select the paper size,
change the zoom level to match that size.

Book to Two-sided
Produces two-sided copies from originals with facing pages.

Facing pages ->
Two-sided
4

3
1

Facing pages ->
Facing pages

4
3

Original

Copy

NOTE: The following sizes of originals and paper are supported in Book
to Two-sided mode. Original: Ledger, Letter-R, A3, B4, A4-R, B5-R, A5-R
and 8K. Paper: Letter, A4 and B5.
The procedure for using duplex/separate-page copying is explained below.

Press the Copy key.

Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Duplex].

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

1-35

Copying Functions

Select the desired
Duplex mode.

Ready to copy.

Copies

Duplex
1-sided
>>1-sided
Press [OK] to display
the image.

1-sided
>>2-sided
2-sided
>>1-sided
2-sided
>>2-sided

Finishing

Book
>>1-sided
Book
>>2-sided

Binding
Left/Right

Add Shortcut

Binding
Top

Cancel

Status

Top Edge Top
Original
Orientation
OK
10/5/2006

If you choose [1 sided >> 2 sided], [2 sided >> 2 sided] or [Book >> 2
sided], select the binding edge of the finished copies in Finishing.

If you choose [2
sided >> 2 sided], [2
sided >> 1 sided],
[Book >> 1 sided] or
[Book >> 2 sided],
select the binding
edge of the originals
in Original.

Ready to copy.

10:10

Copies

Duplex
1-sided
>>1-sided
Press [OK] to display
the image.

1-sided
>>2-sided
2-sided
>>1-sided

Original

Binding
Left/Right

Binding
Top

2-sided
>>2-sided
Book
>>1-sided

Top Edge Top

Book
>>2-sided

Original
Orientation

Add Shortcut

Cancel

Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [Original Orientation] to select orientation of the originals, either [Top
Edge Top] or [Top Edge Left]. Then press [OK].

Press [OK].

Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen and press
the Start key.
If the originals are placed on the platen, consecutively replace each
original after pressing the Start key.
After scanning all originals, press [Scan Finish] to start copying.

1-36

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Copying Functions

Cover Mode
Add a cover to the finished copies. You can copy the first page and/or the
last page onto colored paper or thick paper fed from the different paper
source than the regular one. The following two options are available. Paper
for the cover is supplied from the Multi Purpose tray.
To feed the cover paper from the cassette, refer to Paper Source for Cover
Paper on page 6-15.
Type of Cover

Description

Front Cover

First page of the originals is copied on a different
paper.

Front and Back
Covers

First page and last page of the originals are
copied on different paper.

The procedure for using Cover mode copying is explained below.

Place the originals on the platen.

Press the Copy key.

Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Cover].

Press [Front Cover]
or [Front and Back
Covers].

Ready to copy.

Copies

Cover

Press [OK] to display

Add a cover page of a different color or
thickness, using a different paper source.
Please choose either [Front Cover] or
[Front and Back Covers].
*Set paper source for cover in System Menu.

the image.

None

Add Shortcut

Front Cover

Front and Back
Covers

Cancel

Status

Press [OK].

Press the Start key.

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

If the originals are placed on the platen, consecutively replace each
original after pressing the Start key.
After scanning all originals, press [Scan Finish] to start copying.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

1-37

Copying Functions

Form Overlay
Copy the original images onto the form. Once you scan and register the
form, the form is overlaid onto the original. You can also use a form that is
already registered in the machine's memory.

Forms

Original

Copy

NOTE: To register a form in advance, refer to Image Overlay Form
(Copy) Box on page 4-29 for details.
Follow the steps as below for form overlay.

Press the Copy key.

Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Form Overlay].

Press [Scan New
Form] to use the first
page of originals as
a form.

Ready to copy.

Copies

Form Overlay
Density

Off

(10 - 100)
%

Press [OK] to display
the image.

Select
Stored Form
Scan
New Form

None
Select
Form
Cancel

Add Shortcut
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

NOTE: Press [+] or [–] in [Density] to adjust the density of the form.
Choose from ten levels in 10% increments.
To use the forms
already registered,
press [Select Stored
Form]. Press [Select
Form] to view the
form list. Select the
desired form from
the list and press
[OK].

Ready to copy.

Copies

Form for Form Overlay(Copy)
Name

Date and Time

Size

08/28/2004 10:10

21 MB

Document 1

09/03/2004 10:00

30 MB

Document 2

09/12/2004 10:00

36 MB

Document 3

10/03/2005 10:01

21 MB

Document 4

10/10/2005 10:10

30 MB

Document 0

Cancel
Status

1-38

Form Overlay - Select Form

1/200

Detail

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Copying Functions

NOTE: Press [Detail] to view the selected form data.

Press [OK].

Place the originals.
Place the original for the form on top of the other originals. When using the
optional document processor, the first page of the originals should be
placed on the top.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Press the Start key to start copying.

1-39

Copying Functions

Page Numbering
Number multiple pages of originals in sequential order. The formats for
numbering are [- 1 -], [P.1] or [1/n]. The format [1/n] prints the total number
of pages in the place of n.
The page number is centered at the bottom of the page.

Original

[ – 1 –]

[P.1]

[1/n]

Use the procedure below to insert page numbers on your copies.

Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen.

Press the Copy key.

Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Page #].

Select the
numbering format
from [- 1 -], [P.1] or
[1/n].

Ready to copy.

Copies

Page #
None

Press [OK] to display
the image.

1st Page

(1 - 10)

Auto
Last Page

-1P.1
1/n

Auto

# Keys
Start #

(1 - 999)

Denominator
#

1
Top Edge Top
Original
Orientation

# Keys
Add Shortcut
Status

1-40

Cancel

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

To start page numbering from a page other than the first page, press [+] or
[–] of 1st Page and select the starting page. You can also enter the number
with the numeric keys after pressing [# Keys].

To start the numbering with a number other than 1, press [+] or [–] of Start
Number and enter the starting number. You can also enter the number with
the numeric keys after pressing [# Keys].

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Copying Functions

To specify the page to end numbering, press [Last Page] and select
[Manual]. Press [+] or [–] to enter the ending page and press [OK]. You can
also enter the number with the numeric keys after pressing [# Keys].

The total number of pages n in the format [1/n] can be changed manually.
Press [Denominator #] and select [Manual]. Press [+] or [–] to enter the
total number of pages and press [OK]. You can also enter the number with
the numeric keys after pressing [# Keys].

Press [Original Orientation] to choose orientation of the originals, either
[Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge Left]. Press [OK]

Press [OK].

Press the Start key to start copying.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

1-41

Copying Functions

Memo Mode
Delivers copies with a space for adding notes. You can also copy two
originals onto the same sheet with a space or add lines to indicate page
boundaries.

NOTE: Memo mode is available for the copy paper sizes of Ledger,
Legal, Oficio II, 8.5×13.5", Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, A3, B4, Folio,
A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, 8K, 16K and 16K-R.

Layout A
Reduces images of each original page for printing onto half of a page,
leaving the other half blank for notes.

Original

Copy

Layout B
Reduces images of two original pages for copying onto half of a single
page, leaving the other half blank for notes.

Original

1-42

Copy

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Copying Functions

Types of Page Boundary Lines
The following boundary lines are available.

None

Solid

Dotted

Borders
(Cropmark)

Use the procedure below to insert page boundary lines on your copies.

Place the originals on the platen.

Press the Copy key.

Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Memo Page].

Press [Layout A] or
[Layout B]. Select
the page layout from
Layout.

Ready to copy.

Copies

Memo Page
Layout

Off

Press [OK] to display
the image.

Layout A
Layout B

Upper
L to R

Upper
R to L

None
Border Line

Left
T to B

Add Shortcut

Right
T to B

Top Edge Top

Cancel

Status

Original
Orientation
OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [Border Line] to select the page boundary line. Press [OK].

Press [Original Orientation] to select orientation of the originals, either [Top
Edge Top] or [Top Edge Left]. Press [OK].

Press [OK].

Press the Start key to start copying.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

1-43

Copying Functions

Density Adjustment
Copy density is adjustable.
The table below shows the available settings.
Mode

Description

Manual

Density is adjustable to either 7 or 13 different
levels.

Auto

Optimum density is selected depending on
density of original.

NOTE: You may choose Auto mode as the default setting (refer to
Density on page 6-26).
Follow the steps as below for density adjustment.

Place the originals on the platen.

Press the Copy key.

Press [Image Quality] and then [Density].

To adjust density manually, press [-3] - [+3] (Lighter - Darker).
You can change the density level [-3] - [+3] (Lighter - Darker) by half a step.
To change density
automatically, press
[Auto].

Ready to copy.

Copies

Density
Auto
Press [OK] to display
the image.

Lighter

-3

-2
-2.5

-1
-1.5

Add Shortcut
Status

1-44

Press [OK].

Press the Start key to start copying.

Darker

Normal

0
-0.5

+1
+0.5

+2
+1.5

Cancel

+3
+2.5

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Copying Functions

Image Quality
Select the image quality to suit the type of original.
The table below shows the quality options.
Image Quality
Mode

Description

Text+Photo

Text and photos together.

Text

Only text, no photos.

Photo

Only photos, no text.

Use the procedure below to select the quality of your copies.

Place the originals on the platen.

Press the Copy key.

Press [Image Quality] and then [Original Image].

Select the image
quality.

Ready to copy.

Copies

Original Image

Press [OK] to display

Select original document type
for best copy results.
[Text + Photo]: Text and photos together.
[Text]: Only text, no photos.
[Photo]: Only photos, no text.

the image.

Text+Photo

Text

Photo

Cancel
Status

Press [OK].

Press the Start key to start copying.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

1-45

Copying Functions

EcoPrint
Use EcoPrint to save toner when printing. Use this function for test copies
or any other occasion where high quality print is unnecessary.
The procedure for making copies using EcoPrint is explained below.

Place the originals on the platen.

Press the Copy key.

Press [Image Quality] and then [EcoPrint].

Press [On].

Ready to copy.

Copies

EcoPrint

Press [OK] to display

Conserve toner when printing.
Please use EcoPrint for test copies
and other situations where high-quality
copies are not necessary.

the image.

Off

Add Shortcut
Status

1-46

Press [OK].

Press the Start key to start copying.

Cancel

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Copying Functions

Continuous Scan
When a large number of originals cannot be placed in the document
processor at one time, the originals can be scanned in separate batches
and then copied as one job. With this function, originals are scanned until
you press [Scan Finish].
Any of the following settings can be changed during scanning.
•

Original size selection

•

Original orientation

•

Image quality selection

•

Type of original (2-sided/book original)

•

Zoom

•

Border erase

•

Density

If you use Job Build, you can insert a blank paper during scanning or a
blank page during duplex copying.
The procedure for making copies using Continuous Scan is explained
below.

Press the Copy key.

Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Continuous Scan].

If Continuous Scan is selected, press [On].
If Job Build is
selected, press [Job
Build] and select
desired binding
orientation.

Ready to copy.

Copies

Continuous Scan
Off

Press [OK] to display

Select desired binding orientation.

the image.
Job Build

Binding
Left
Add Shortcut
Status

Binding
Right
Cancel

Binding
Top
OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen and press
the Start key.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

1-47

Copying Functions
If [Job Build] is
selected, the next
page can be
changed. Press
[Sheet Insertion] to
insert a blank paper.
Press [Next Copy:
On Back] in duplex
copying to print the
next page on back
page.

Copies

Scan next original(s).
Place the originals and press Start key.
Press Scan Finish to start copying.
Job No.: 000021

Job Name: doc20060505113414

Scanner Setting
Auto
Original
Size
2-sided
2-sided/Book
Original
Auto
Density

Top Edge Top

Text+Photo

Original
Orientation

Original
Image

100%
Zoom

Pages

Next Copy:On Front

Off
Border Erase

Next Copy:
On Back

Letter
Plain
Paper
Selection

Sheet
Insertion
Cancel

Status

User Name: ----Finished Pages

Scan Finish
10/5/2006

10:10

Place the next original and press the Start key. Repeat these steps to scan
the remaining originals.
After scanning all originals, press [Scan finish] to start copying.

1-48

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Copying Functions

Auto Image Rotation
Automatically rotates the image when the sizes of the original and the
loaded paper matches but the orientations are different. The images will be
rotated 90° counter-clockwise prior to copying.

NOTE: To set Auto Image Rotation as the default mode, refer to Auto
Image Rotation on page 6-31.
The procedure for making copies using Auto Image Rotation is explained
below.

Place the originals on the platen.

Press the Copy key.

Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Auto Image Rotation].

Press [On] to select
Auto Image
Rotation.

Ready to copy.

Copies

Auto Image Rotation

Press [OK] to display

When original and paper source size are the
same, but their orientation is different,
rotate image 90 degrees when copying.

the image.

Off

Add Shortcut
Status

Press [OK].

Press the Start key to start copying.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Cancel

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

1-49

Copying Functions

Negative Image
Inverts black and white portions of the image for printing.
Use the procedure below to make negative image copies.

Place the originals on the platen.

Press the Copy key.

Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Negative Image].

Press [On] to select
Negative Image.

Ready to copy.

Copies

Negative Image
Invert black and white in image to print
"negative" copies.
Press [OK] to display
the image.

Off

Add Shortcut
Status

1-50

Press [OK].

Press the Start key to start copying.

Cancel

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Copying Functions

Mirror Image
Copies the mirrored image of the original.
Use the procedure below to make mirror image copies.

Place the originals on the platen.

Press the Copy key.

Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Mirror Image].

Press [On] to select
Mirror Image.

Ready to copy.

Copies

Mirror Image
Print left-right mirrored copies
of original.
Press [OK] to display
the image.

Off

Add Shortcut
Status

Press [OK].

Press the Start key to start copying.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Cancel

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

1-51

Copying Functions

Job Finish Notice
Sends a notice by E-mail when a copy job is complete. User can be notified
of the completion of a copy job while working at a remote desk, saving the
time spent waiting beside the machine for copying to finish.

NOTE: PC should be configured in advance so that E-mail can be used.
Example of Job Finish Notice

To:

h_pttr@owl-net.net

Subject:

1234 Job end report mail

Job No.:

000002

Result:

End Time:

Wed 27 Apr 2005 14:56:08

File Name:

doc27042005145608

Job Type:

Copy

-----------------------------------------------1234
[00:c0:ee:d0:01:14]
------------------------------------------------

Use the procedure below to enable job finish notification when making
copies.

1-52

Place the originals on the platen.

Press the Copy key.

Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Job Finish Notice].

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Copying Functions

To select the
Ready to copy.
address to be
Job Finish Notice
notified from the
Off
address book, press
Destination
Detail
Address Book
User A
abc@def.com
[Address Book] on
Address
the left of the screen
Entry
and then press
[Address Book] in
Detail
Address Book
the next screen.
Press [Address
Add Shortcut
Cancel
Book], select
desired E-mail
address and press
[OK].
Press [Detail] to view the data of the selected destination.
Status

To directly enter the
E-mail address,
press [Address
Entry]. Press [E-mail
Address], enter the
address and press
[OK].

Ready to copy.

Copies

OK
10/5/2006

Copies

10:10

Job Finish Notice
Off
Address Book

E-mail
Address

Address
Entry

Add Shortcut
Status

Cancel

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

Press the Start key to start copying. Upon completion of the job, an E-mail
notice is sent to the selected destination.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

1-53

Copying Functions

File Name
Names a copy job. Add other information such as date and time or job
number as necessary. You can check a job history or job status using the
job name, date and time, or job number specified here.
Use the procedure below to assign a name to your copy job.

Place the originals on the platen.

Press the Copy key.

Press [Advanced Setup] and then [File Name Entry].

Press [File Name], enter the name for a copy job, and press [OK].
To add date and
time, press [Date
and Time]. To add
job number, [Job
No.]. Added
information is
displayed in
Additional Info.

Ready to copy.

Copies

Add a file name.
Additional information such as [Job No.]
and [Date and Time] can also be set.

File Name

doc

Additional Info.
Job No.

Job No.

Date and Time

Add Shortcut
Status

1-54

File Name Entry

Press [OK].

Press the Start key to start copying.

Cancel

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Copying Functions

Priority Override
Suspends a current job and gives the selected job priority for copying. The
suspended job resumes after Priority Override copying is finished.

NOTE: The current job that is selected as Priority Override cannot be
suspended.
The procedure for using Priority Override is explained below.

Place the originals on the platen.

Press the Copy key.

Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Priority Override].

Press [On] to select
Priority Override.

Ready to copy.

Copies

Priority Override
Give print job top priority and complete it
before returning to other print jobs.
Press [OK] to display
the image.

Off

Add Shortcut
Status

Cancel

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

Press the Start key. The current copy job is suspended and the copy job
selected in Priority Override starts. The suspended job resumes after
Priority Override copying is finished.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

1-55

Copying Functions

Multi-Page Forms
Copies multiple originals bound together as a single set, such as
accounting forms. The optional document processor is required.

Use the procedure below to make multi-page forms when copying.

Place an original in the document processor.

NOTE: Place the original forms one by one in the document processor.
Insert originals binding side first in the document processor.

Press the Copy key.

Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Multi-Page Form].

Press [On] to select
Multi-Page Form
copying.

Ready to copy.

Copies

Multi-page Form
Copy a multi-page original such as a form,
using the document processor.
Press [OK] to display
the image.

Off

Add Shortcut
Status

1-56

Press [OK].

Press the Start key to start copying.

Cancel

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Copying Functions

Repeat Copy
Enable additional copies in the desired quantity as necessary after a copy
job is completed. For confidential documents, you can set up a pass code
for the use of Repeat Copy. In such a case, the correct pass code must be
entered when using Repeat Copy or copies will not be delivered.
IMPORTANT: A Repeat Copy job is cleared when the main power switch
is turned off.
Repeat Copy is not available when the machine is equipped with the
optional Security Kit.
Repeat Copy cannot be used when the maximum number of Repeat Copy
jobs to retain in the document box is set to zero (refer to Maximum Number
of Repeat Copy Jobs Retained on page 1-58).
You can select Repeat Copy as default setting. Refer to Repeat
Copying on page 6-36.
Giving a file name to a copy job will facilitate identification of the data when
copying (refer to File Name on page 1-54).

Selecting Repeat Copy
Use the procedure below to select repeat copying.

Press the Copy key.

Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Repeat Copy].

Press [On].
To register a
password, press [#
Keys] and enter a 4digit password.

Ready to copy.

Copies

Repeat Copy
Off

Press [OK] to display

Password(4 digits)

the image.

# Keys

Add Shortcut
Status

Cancel

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

IMPORTANT: If you forget the pass code, Repeat Copy will be
unavailable. Make a note of the pass code beforehand if necessary.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Press [OK].

1-57

Copying Functions

Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen. Press the
Start key to start copying and register this job as a Repeat Copy job.

Outputting Repeat Copy Jobs
The Repeat Copy jobs are stored in the Document Box. Refer to Job
Box on page 4-2 to print out the Repeat Copy jobs.

Maximum Number of Repeat Copy Jobs Retained
You can use the procedure below to change the maximum number of copy
jobs that can be retained in the document box.
Use the procedure below to change the maximum number of copy jobs
retained.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Document Box/Removable Memory] and then [Next] of Job Box.

Press [Change] of Repeat Copy Job Retention.

Use the [+] or [-] key
to enter the
maximum retention
number.

Document Box/Removable Memory - Repeat Copy Job Retention
Set the maximum number of repeat copy jobs to retain.
Use [-]/[+] or the numeric keys to enter a number.
*Set this number to 0 to not retain any repeat copy jobs.
(0 - 50)

You can also enter
the number from the
number keypad.
A number between 0
and 50 can be
entered as the
number of retained
jobs.

job(s)

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

NOTE: If you enter a value of 0 (zero), you cannot use the Repeat Copy
function.

1-58

Press [OK].

When exiting, press the Close key repeatedly to return to the System
Menu default screen.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Copying Functions

Programmed Copying (Copying and Sending)
After registering sets of frequently used functions as a single program, you
can simply press the program number as needed to recall those functions.
You can also name the programs for easy identification when recalling.

NOTE: Sending operation can be registered in the program as well. Up
to 50 functions combining copying and sending can be registered in the
program.
If user login is enabled, you can only register functions by logging in with
administrator privileges.

Registering Programs
Use the procedure below to register a program.
The following procedure is an example of registering the copying function.

Press the Program key while the copy mode is accessed.

Press [Register] and press a number (01 to 50) for the program number.
If entering Program screen from the Copy screen or Send screen, go to
step 4.

NOTE: If you select a program number already registered, the currently
registered functions can be replaced with a new set of functions.

Check that [Copy] is selected, and press [Next].

Enter the new program name and press [Register] to register the program.

Recalling Programs
Use the procedure below to recall a registered program.

Press the Program key.

Press [Call] and
press the key
corresponding to the
program number (01
to 50) to recall.
Press [No.] to enter
the program number
directly for recalling.

Program
01

Call
Status

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

No.

Edit
10/5/2006

10:10

1-59

Copying Functions

NOTE: If the program cannot be recalled, the Document Box or the form
overlay specified in the program might have been deleted. Check the
Document Box.

Place the originals and press the Start key. Copying is performed
according to the registered program.

Editing and Deleting Programs
You can change program number and program name, or delete program.
Use the procedure below to edit or delete a program.

Press the Program key.

Press [Edit] and press the key(s) corresponding to the program number (01
to 50) to change or delete.

To edit a program, use the procedure for registering a program and press
[Edit]. Then change the program number and program name and press
[Register]. Choose [Yes] in the confirmation screen to change the program.
To delete the
program, press
[Delete this
Program]. Choose
[Yes] in the
confirmation screen
to finally delete the
program.

Program Detail:
No.
01

Delete this Program
Status

1-60

Change

Name:

Change

2 in 1

Cancel

10:10

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Copying Functions

Registering Shortcuts (Copying and Sending)
Add shortcuts in the Quick Setup screen for easy access to the frequently
used functions. A function name linked to a registered shortcut can be
changed as necessary. You can register shortcuts for up to 5 copying
functions and up to 6 sending functions.

NOTE: In the default settings, [Interrupt Copy] is registered to the
shortcut key number 01 of the copy function.

Adding Shortcuts
Shortcut registration is performed in the setup screen of each function.
Shortcuts can be registered for all functions in which [Add Shortcut]
appears on the screen.
Use the procedure below to register a shortcut.

After making the
desired settings in
the setup screen of
each function, press
[Add Shortcut].

Ready to copy.

Copies

Page #
None

Press [OK] to display
the image.

1st Page

(1 - 10)

Auto
Last Page

-1P.1
1/n

Auto

# Keys
Start #

(1 - 999)

Denominator
#

1
Top Edge Top
Original
Orientation

# Keys
Add Shortcut
Status

Cancel

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press the keys corresponding to the shortcut number (01 to 06) to register.

NOTE: If you select a shortcut number already registered, the currently
registered shortcut can be replaced with a new one.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Enter the shortcut name and press [Register] to add the shortcut. Press
[Close].

1-61

Copying Functions

Editing and Deleting Shortcuts
Follow the steps as below to change shortcut number/name or delete
shortcut.

In the setup screen
of each function,
press [Add Shortcut]
in the bottom of the
screen.

Ready to copy.

Copies

Memo Page
Layout

Off

Press [OK] to display
the image.

Layout A
Layout B

Upper
L to R

Upper
R to L

None
Border Line

Left
T to B

Right
T to B

Add Shortcut

Cancel

Status

Original
Orientation
OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [Edit] and press the keys corresponding to the shortcut number (01
to 06) to change or delete.

To edit a shortcut, use the procedure for registering the shortcut and press
[Edit]. Then change the shortcut key number and name and press
[Register].
To delete the
shortcut, press
[Delete this
Shortcut]. Choose
[Yes] in the
confirmation screen
to delete the
shortcut.

Shortcut: 01
Shortcut No.:

Change

Shortcut Name:

Change

2in1

Delete this Shortcut
Status

1-62

Top Edge Top

Cancel

10:10

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

2 Sending Functions
This chapter explains the functions available for sending
originals.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

•

Original Size Selection ................................................. 2-2

•
•
•
•
•

Sending Size Selection ................................................ 2-4
Zoom ............................................................................ 2-6
Centering...................................................................... 2-7
Mixed Sized Originals................................................... 2-8
1-sided/2-sided Selection ............................................2-11

•

Original Orientation .................................................... 2-12

•
•

File Format ................................................................. 2-14
PDF Encryption Functions.......................................... 2-16

•
•

File Separation ........................................................... 2-19
Image Quality ............................................................. 2-20

•
•

Scan Density .............................................................. 2-21
Scan Resolution ......................................................... 2-22

•
•
•

Sharpness .................................................................. 2-23
Background Density Adjustment ................................ 2-24
Color / Grayscale / Monochrome Selection................ 2-25

•
•

Multi-page Form ......................................................... 2-26
Continuous Scan ........................................................ 2-27

•
•
•
•
•
•

Border Erase .............................................................. 2-28
Enter Document Name/File Name ............................. 2-31
Enter E-mail Subject and Body .................................. 2-32
Finish Notice............................................................... 2-33
Send and Print............................................................ 2-35
Send and Store .......................................................... 2-36

2-1

Sending Functions

Original Size Selection
Select the size of originals that will serve as the basis for scanning. Be sure
to select the original size when using originals of nonstandard sizes.
Choose the original size from the following groups of original size.
Item

Detail

Standard
Sizes 1

Select from
automatic
detection and
standard sizes.

Size
Inch models: Auto, Ledger, Legal,
Letter, Letter-R, Statement,
Statement-R, 8.5×13.5", Oficio II-R,
11×15"
Metric models: Auto, A3, B4, A4,
A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5, A5-R, B6, B6-R,
A6-R, Folio

Standard
Sizes 2

Select from
standard sizes
except Standard
Sizes 1 .

Inch models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5,
B5-R, A5, A5-R, B6, B6-R, A6-R,
Folio, 8K, 16 K, 16K-R

Others

Select from
Hagaki and
Custom Original
Size *.

Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, Custom 1 to 4

Size Entry

Enter the size
that is not
indicated in
Standard Sizes
1 and 2**.

Inch models
Horizontal: 2 to 17" (in 0.01"
increments), Vertical: 2 to 11.69" (in
0.01" increments)

*
**

Metric models: Ledger, Legal, Letter,
Letter-R, Statement, Statement-R,
8.5×13.5", Oficio II-R, 11×15", 8K,
16K, 16K-R

Metric models
Horizontal: 50 to 432 mm (in 1 mm
increments), Vertical: 50 to 297 mm (in
1 mm increments)

Regarding the setting method of Custom Original Size (Custom 1 to
4), refer to Custom Original Size Setup on page 6-6.
The input units can be changed in the System menu.
Refer to Switching Unit of Measurement on page 6-17.

Use the procedure below to select the original size when sending scanned
images.

2-2

Place the originals on the platen.

Press the Send key.

Press [Type of Original/Transmission] and then [Original Size].

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Sending Functions

Press [Standard
Sizes 1], [Standard
Sizes 2], [Others], or
[Size Entry] to select
original size.

Ready to send.

Destination

Place original.

Original Size

Press [OK] to display
the image.

Standard
Sizes 1

Auto

Ledger

Letter

Standard
Sizes 2

Letter

Legal

Statement

11x15"

8.5x13.5"

Others

OficioII
Size Entry

Add Shortcut

Cancel

Status

When you have
selected [Size
Entry], press [+] or [] to set the sizes of X
(horizontal) and Y
(vertical). By
pressing [# Keys],
you can use the
numeric keys.

10/5/2006

Ready to send.

10:10

Destination

Place original.

Original Size
Standard
Sizes 1
Press [OK] to display
the image.

(2.00 - 17.00)
11.00

Standard
Sizes 2
# Keys

Others
Y
Size Entry

(2.00 - 11.69)
8.50

# Keys
Add Shortcut

Cancel

Status

Press [OK].

Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

2-3

Sending Functions

Sending Size Selection
Select the sending size (the size of image to be sent).
The table below lists the sizes.
Item

Detail

Size

Standard
Sizes 1

Select from Same
as Original Size or
Standard Size.

Inch models: Same as Original Size,
Ledger, Legal, Letter, Statement,
8.5×13.5", Oficio II, 11×15"
Metric models: Same as Original Size,
A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, B6, A6, Folio

Standard
Sizes 2

Others

Select from
standard size
except Standard
Sizes 1.

Inch models: A3, B4, A4, B5, A5,
B6, A6, Folio, 8K, 16K

Select from
Hagaki.

Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki

Metric models: Ledger, Legal,
Letter, Statement, 8.5×13.5",
Oficio II, 11×15", 8K, 16K

Relationship between Original Size, Sending Size, and Zoom
Original Size (page 2-2), Sending Size, and Zoom (page 2-6) are related
to each other. Refer to the following table.
Original Size and the size you
wish to send as are

the same

different

Original Size

Specify as
necessary

Sending Size

Select [Same as
Original Size]

Select the
required size

Zoom

Select [100%]
(or [Auto])

Select [Auto]

NOTE: When you select Sending Size that is different from Original Size,
and select the Zoom [100%], you can send the image as the actual size
(No Zoom).
Use the procedure below to select the size for transmission when sending
scanned images.

2-4

Place the originals on the platen.

Press the Send Key.

Press [Type of Original/Transmission] and then [Sending Size].

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Sending Functions

Press [Standard
Sizes 1], [Standard
Sizes 2], or [Others]
to select the sending
size.

Destination

Ready to send.
Place original.

Press [OK] to display
the image.

Standard
Sizes 1

Same as
Original

Ledger

Letter

Standard
Sizes 2

Legal

Statement

11x15"

8.5x13.5"

OficioII

Others

Add Shortcut

Cancel

Status

Press [OK].

Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Sending Size

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

2-5

Sending Functions

Zoom
Scans the original by automatically zooming it depending on the sending
size.
The table below lists the available options.
Item

Detail

100%

No Zoom (to be scanned at actual size)

Auto

Zoomed automatically according to the specified
sending size.

NOTE: When zooming in or out, see Sending Size Selection on page 2-4
when selecting the sending size.
When Custom Size or Size Entry is selected as the original size, the
originals are sent at normal size and zooming cannot be used.
Depending on the combination of original size and sending size, the image
is placed at the edge of the paper. To center the image vertically and
horizontally on the page, use the centering setting described in
Centering on page 2-7.
Use the procedure below to enlarge or reduce the original to match the
transmission size.

Place the originals on the platen.

Press the Send key.

Select the transmission size.

Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Zoom].

Press [100%] or
[Auto].

Ready to send.

Destination

Place original.

Zoom

Press [OK] to display

Enlarge or reduce original when scanning.
[100%]: Scan at actual size.
[Auto]: Enlarge or reduce to match
sending size/storing size.

the image.

100%

Add Shortcut

Auto

Cancel

Status

2-6

OK
10/5/2006

Press [OK].

Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending.

10:10

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Sending Functions

Centering
When you have scanned the original after specifying the original size and
sending size, depending on these sizes, a margin is created at the bottom,
left, or right side of paper. By using the centering, the image is placed with
a margin equally created at each of the page Top/Bottom and Left/Right.
Use the procedure below to center then image when sending a scanned
image.

Place the originals on the platen.

Press the Send key.

Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Centering].

Press [On].
Centering is
performed.

Ready to send.

Destination

Enter Destination.

Centering
Move image to center of page during scan.
Press [OK] to display
the image.

Off

Add Shortcut

Cancel

Status

Press [OK].

Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

2-7

Sending Functions

Mixed Sized Originals
Using the optional document processor, the originals of different sizes can
be placed in a batch and sent. In this operation, up to 30 originals of
different sizes can be placed in the document processor at the same time.
Originals of the Same Width
When the original widths are the same, the combinations of originals that
can be placed are as follows.
•

Ledger and Letter (A3 and A4)

Ledger

•

2-8

Letter

Ledger

Legal and Letter-R (Folio and A4-R)

Legal

•

Letter

Letter-R

Letter-R
Legal

B4 and B5

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Sending Functions
When the original widths are different
The combinations of originals of different sizes that can be placed together
are as follows.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

•

A3, B4, A4, B5

•

B4, A4-R, B5

•

Folio, A4-R, B5-R

2-9

Sending Functions
Use the procedure below to send mixed sized originals as a batch.

Place the original into the document processor.
IMPORTANT: When you place originals of different width, place the top
edge of originals to align with the width guide at the backside. If the
originals are placed unevenly, they may not be scanned correctly.

Press the Send key.

Press [Type of Original/Transmission] and then [Mixed Sized Originals].

Select the
combination of
originals from [Same
Width] and [Diff
Width].

Ready to send.

Destination

Mixed Sized Originals
Scan all sheets in document processor,
even if differently sized, then send.
*Up to 30 sheets can be placed in
document processor.

Press [OK] to display
the image.
Off

Add Shortcut

Same Width

Diff Width

Cancel

Status

2-10

OK
10/5/2006

Press [OK].

Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending.

10:10

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Sending Functions

1-sided/2-sided Selection
Select the type and binding of original depending on the original.
The table below lists the binding directions for each original type.
Original

Type

Binding

1-sided Sheet Original

1-sided

—

2-sided Sheet Original

2-sided*

Binding Left/Right,
Binding Top

Open Book Original such
as magazine and book

Book

Binding Left,
Binding Right

Only when the optional document processor is used.

NOTE: To scan colored 2-sided originals using the optional document
processor, you need to add memory to the machine. Contact to your
service representative.
Use the procedure below to select the original type and binding direction
when sending scanned originals.

Place the originals on the platen.

Press the Send key.

Press [Type of Original/Transmission] and then [2-sided/Book Original]

Press [1-sided], [2sided], or [Book].

Ready to send.

Destination

Place original.

2-sided/Book Original
1-sided

Press [OK] to display
the image.

Binding

2-sided
Left

Right

Book

Top Edge Top
Original
Orientation
Add Shortcut

Cancel

Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

If you selected [2-sided] or [Book], you should also select the binding
direction and press [Original Orientation] to select the direction in which the
original is set on the platen.

Press [OK].

Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

2-11

Sending Functions

Original Orientation
To send the document in the orientation that can be read properly, specify
the upper orientation of original. To use the functions below, select the
orientation in which the original is set on the platen.
•

1-sided / 2-sided Selection

•

Border Erase

If [On] is selected as the Orientation Confirmation setting in the
System Menu, the selection screen for original orientation appears
when you select any of the above functions.

When placing the original on the platen

Original

[Top Edge Top]

[Top Edge Left]

When placing the original on the optional document processor

Original

[Top Edge Top]

[Top Edge Left]

Use the procedure below to select the orientation when placing the
originals on the platen for sending.

2-12

Place the originals on the platen.

Press the Send key.

Press [Type of Original/Transmission] and then [Original Orientation].

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Sending Functions

Select original
orientation from
[Top Edge Top] and
[Top Edge Left].

Ready to send.

Destination

Place original.

Original Orientation
Enter the orientation of the
original document's top edge.
Press [OK] to display
the image.

Top Edge Top

Add Shortcut

Top Edge Left

Cancel

Status

Press [OK].

Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

2-13

Sending Functions

File Format
Select the file format of the image to send.
The table below lists the file formats and their details.
Adjustable range of image
quality

Color mode

PDF

1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)

Full Color, Grayscale,
Monochrome

TIFF

1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)

Full Color, Grayscale,
Monochrome

JPEG

1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)

Full Color, Grayscale

High Comp.
PDF *

1 Compression Ratio Priority
to 3 Quality Priority

Full Color

File Format

Only displayed when the optional PDF Upgrade Kit is installed.

NOTE: In the color mode, when grayscale is selected, [JPEG] is
displayed, and when full color is selected, [JPEG] and [High Comp. PDF]
are displayed.
When the color mode in scanning has been selected for Grayscale or Full
Color, you can adjust the image quality Regarding color mode, refer to
Color / Grayscale / Monochrome Selection on page 2-25.
When the optional PDF upgrade kit has been installed, you can use PDF
encryption functions. For details, refer to the following PDF Encryption
Functions.
Use the procedure below to select the file format for transmission.

2-14

Place the originals on the platen.

Press the Send key.

Press [Type of Original/Transmission] and then [File Format].

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Sending Functions

Select the file format from [PDF], [TIFF], [JPEG], and [High Comp. PDF].
When the color
mode in scanning
has been selected
for Grayscale or Full
Color, set the image
quality.
If the optional PDF
upgrade kit is
installed, press
[Encryption] and
specify the
encryption settings.

Ready to send.

Destination

Place original.

Image Quality
Low Quality
(High Comp.)

PDF

Press [OK] to display

High Quality
(Low Comp.)

TIFF

the image.
JPEG

High Comp.
PDF
Off
Encryption

Add Shortcut

Cancel

Status

Press [OK].

Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

File Format

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

2-15

Sending Functions

PDF Encryption Functions
If you have selected PDF or High Comp. PDF for file format, you can
restrict the access level for displaying, printing, and editing PDF's by
assigning a secure password.

NOTE: You need to use the optional PDF upgrade kit.
The items you can restrict the access level with are as follows.
Item

Value

Detail

Compatibility

Acrobat4.0 or later,
Acrobat5.0 or later

Select the version that is
compatible with the PDF file.

Password to
open
document

Off, On

Enter the password to open the
PDF file

Password to
edit/print
document

Off, On

Enter the password to edit the
PDF file
When you have entered the
password to edit/print
document, you can specifically
limit the operation.

When you send a PDF file, use the procedure below to encrypt the PDF
file for transmission.

Place the originals on the platen.

Press the Send key.

Press [Type of Original/Transmission], [File Format], [PDF] or [High Comp.
PDF], and [Encryption].

Press [T] of
Compatibility, select
Acrobat4.0 or later
or Acrobat5.0 or
later.

File Format - Encryption
Compatibility

Acrobat4.0 and later
Middle(40-bit)

Password to open
document.

Password
to edit/print
document.

Off

Password

Confirmation

Off

Password

Confirmation
Detail
Cancel

2-16

When you enter the password to open the PDF file, select [On] of
Password to open document.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Sending Functions

Press [Password], enter a password (up to 255 characters) and then press
[OK].

NOTE: For the character entry method, refer to the Operation Guide.

Press [Confirmation] and enter the password again for confirmation. Then
press [OK].

When you enter the password to edit the PDF file, select [On] of Password
to edit/print document..

In the same way as the entry of Password to open document., enter the
password to change the PDF file.

Press [Detail].

Restrict the access level of the PDF file. Press [T] of Printing Allowed to
select the item (the scope of limit). The item to be displayed differs
according to the version of Acrobat selected in Compatibility in step 4.
The table below shows the available settings.
Item

Detail

Not Allowed

Make the printing of PDF file impossible

Allowed (Low
Resolution only)*

Can print the PDF file only in low resolution

Allowed

Can print the PDF file in original resolution

Only displayed when [Acrobat5.0 and later] is selected in
Compatibility.
File Format - Detail Setting
Printing Allowed

Not Allowed

Changes Allowed

Allowed

Copying of Text/Images/Others
Disable

Enable

Cancel

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Press [T] of Changes Allowed, and select the item (the scope of limit). The
item to be displayed differs according to the version of Acrobat selected in
Compatibility in step 4.

2-17

Sending Functions
The table below shows the available settings.
Item

Detail

Not Allowed

Cannot change the PDF file

Commenting

Can only add commenting

Inserting/Deleting/
Rotating Pages*

Can only insert, delete, and rotate the pages of
the PDF file

Page Layout
except extracting
Pages**

Can change the page layout except extracting
the pages of the PDF file

Any except
extracting Pages

Can conduct all operations except extracting the
pages of the PDF file

Only displayed when [Acrobat5.0 and later] is selected in
Compatibility.
Only displayed when [Acrobat4.0 and later] is selected in
Compatibility.

From Copying of Text/Images/Others, select [Disable] or [Enable].
The table below shows the available settings.
Item

2-18

Detail

Disable

Prohibit the copying of text and objects on the
PDF file.

Enable

Can copy text and objects on the PDF file.

Press [OK] to return to File Format.

Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Sending Functions

File Separation
Create several files by dividing scanned original data page by page, and
send the files.
Use the procedure below to split scanned original data into separate files
when sending scanned originals.

Place the originals on the platen.

Press the Send key.

Press [Type of Original/Transmission] and then [File Separation].

Press [Each Page]
to set File
Separation.

Ready to send.

Destination

Place original.

File Separation
Create and send a file for each page
of the original that was read.
Press [OK] to display
the image.

Off

Add Shortcut
Status

Each Page

Cancel

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

Specify the destination, and press the Start key. The scanned original is
sent after being divided into files of one page each. Three-digit serial
number such as abc_001.pdf, abc_002.pdf... is attached to the end of the
file name.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

2-19

Sending Functions

Image Quality
Select image quality suitable to the type of original.
The table below shows the quality options.
Item

Detail

Text + Photo

Text and photos together.

Text

Only text, no photos.

Photo

Only photos, no text.

for OCR

For documents to be read by OCR.

Use the procedure below to select the quality when sending scanned
originals.

Place the originals on the platen.

Press the Send key.

Press [Color/Image] and then [Original Image].

Select Image
Quality.

Ready to send.

Destination

Enter Destination.

Original Image
Select the original document type.
[for OCR]: For documents to be read by OCR.
Press [OK] to display
the image.
Text+Photo

Text

Photo

for OCR

Add Shortcut

Cancel

Status

2-20

OK
10/5/2006

Press [OK].

Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending.

10:10

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Sending Functions

Scan Density
Use the procedure below to adjust the scanning density when sending
scanned originals. You can adjust the scan density either automatically or
manually.
The table below shows the available settings.
Item

Detail

Manual density
adjustment

Can set density using 7 or 13 levels.

Auto density
adjustment

Can set the optimal scan density according to
the density of original.

The procedure for adjusting the scanning density when sending a scanned
image is explained below.

Place the originals on the platen.

Press the Send key.

Press [Color/Image] and then [Density].

When selecting
manual density
adjustment, press [3] to [+3] (Lighter Darker) to adjust
density.

Ready to send.

Destination

Enter Destination.

Auto
Press [OK] to display
the image.

Lighter

Darker

Normal

-3

When selecting auto
density adjustment,
press [Auto].

-2
-2.5

-1
-1.5

Add Shortcut

0
-0.5

+1
+0.5

+2
+1.5

Cancel

Status

Press [OK].

Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Density

+3
+2.5

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

2-21

Sending Functions

Scan Resolution
Select the fineness of scanning resolution. The finer the scanning
becomes (the larger the number becomes), the better the image quality
becomes. However, better resolution also results in larger file size (file
capacity) and longer scanning and sending times. The selectable
resolution is 200×100dpi Normal, 200×200dpi Fine, 200×400dpi Super
Fine, 300×300dpi, 400×400dpi Ultra Fine, or 600×600dpi.

NOTE: For an image displayed on a computer screen, 96 dpi (in the case
of Windows), and for an image printed by a printer, 150 to 600 dip, are
generally standard. To enlarge an image and print it in a large size, you
should scan the original at a high resolution.
When 200×100dpi Normal or 200×400dpi Super Fine is selected, an image
size may be shrunk vertically or horizontally depending on the using
application.
The procedure for adjusting the scanning resolution when sending a
scanned image is explained below.

Place the originals on the platen.

Press the Send key.

Press [Color/Image] and then [Scan Resolution].

Select the
resolution.

Ready to send.

Destination

Place original.

Scan Resolution

Press [OK] to display

Select fineness of scanning resolution.
The larger the number, the better the
image resolution.

the image.
600x600dpi

400x400dpi
Ultra Fine

300x300dpi

200x400dpi
Super Fine

200x200dpi
Fine

200x100dpi
Normal

Add Shortcut

Cancel

Status

2-22

OK
10/5/2006

Press [OK].

Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending.

10:10

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Sending Functions

Sharpness
Select the sharpness of the image outline.
The table below shows the available settings.
Item

Detail

Sharpen

Emphasize the image outline. Make letters and
lines appear sharper.

Unsharpen

Blur the image outline. Can weaken a Moire
effect (grids appearing as wavelike patterns
when scanning printed photos).

NOTE: You cannot specify the sharpness if you selected [Monochrome]
in Color Selection (see page 2-25).
Use the procedure below to set the sharpness when sending scanned
images.

Place the originals on the platen.

Press the Send key.

Press [Color/Image] and then [Sharpness].

Press [-3] to [+3]
(Unsharpen Sharpen) to adjust
the sharpness.

Ready to send.

Destination

Place original.

Press [OK] to display
the image.

Unsharpen

-3

Sharpen

-2

Add Shortcut

-1

Cancel

Status

Press [OK].

Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Sharpness

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

2-23

Sending Functions

Background Density Adjustment
Lightens the background of the colored original when it is too dark.

NOTE: You cannot adjust the background density if you selected
[Monochrome] in Color Selection (see page 2-25).
Use the procedure below to set the background density when sending
scanned images.

Place the originals on the platen.

Press the Send key.

Press [Color/Image] and then [Background Density Adj.].

Press [On], and
press [1] to [5]
(Lighter - Darker) to
adjust the density.

Ready to send.

Destination

Place original.

Off

Background
Lighter

Press [OK] to display

Darker

the image.

Add Shortcut

Cancel

Status

2-24

Background Density Adj.

OK
10/5/2006

Press [OK].

Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending.

10:10

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Sending Functions

Color / Grayscale / Monochrome Selection
This feature allows you to select the select the color mode used for
scanning when sending images. You can select from Full Color, Grayscale
or Monochrome.

NOTE: To scan colored 2-sided originals using the optional document
processor, you need to add memory to the machine. Contact your service
representative.
Use the procedure below to select the color mode when sending scanned
images.

Place the originals on the platen.

Press the Send key.

Press [Color/Image] and then [Color Selection].

Press either [Full
Color], [Grayscale],
or [Monochrome].

Ready to send.

Destination

Place original.

Color Selection

Press [OK] to display

Select a scanning color setting.
[Full Color]: Send in full color.
[Grayscale]: Send in 256 shades of gray.
[Monochrome]: Send in black and white.

the image.

Full Color

Add Shortcut

Grayscale

Monochrome

Cancel

Status

Press [OK].

Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

2-25

Sending Functions

Multi-page Form
This function allows you to scan and send multiple-page bound originals
such as forms. The optional document processor is required.

Use the procedure below to transmit multi-page forms.

Place originals in the document processor.

NOTE: Place one form of originals at a time.
When placing the originals, insert the originals into the document
processor, the bound edge first.

Press the Send key.

Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Multi-page Form].

Press [On] to select
Multi-page Form
sending.

Ready to send.

Destination

Enter Destination.

Multi-page Form
Scan a multi-page original such as a form,
using the document processor.
Press [OK] to display
the image.

Off

Add Shortcut
Status

2-26

Cancel

OK
10/5/2006

Press [OK].

Specify the destination, and press the Start key. Transmission begins.

10:10

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Sending Functions

Continuous Scan
When the multi-page originals cannot be placed in the document processor
at one time, the originals can be scanned in separate batches and then
sent as one job. With this function, originals can be scanned one after
another until you press [Scan finish].
Any of the following settings can be changed during scanning.
•

Original Size selection

•

1-sided / 2-sided selection

•

Sending Size selection

•

Original Orientation

•

Image Quality

•

Scan density

•

Scan resolution

•

Zoom

•

Border Erase

The procedure for using continuous scanning when sending scanned
images is explained below.

Press the Send key.

Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Continuous Scan].

Press [On].
Continuous Scan is
selected.

Ready to send.

Destination

Enter Destination.

Continuous Scan
Scan originals from Document Processor and
platen for output as one job.
*Settings can be changed during scanning.

Press [OK] to display
the image.

Off

Add Shortcut
Status

Press [OK].

Specify the destination.

Place the original, and press the Start key.

Cancel

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

When the scanning is completed, change the settings as necessary.

Place the next original, and press the Start key. Scan the remaining
originals by the same procedure.
When you have scanned all the originals, press [Scan finish] to start
sending.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

2-27

Sending Functions

Border Erase
Use Border Erase to remove black shadows that appear around the
outside of the original when scanning and sending originals. The following
options can be selected.
Border Erase Sheet
Erases black borders around the single sheet original.

Original

Copy

Border Erase Book
Erases black borders around the edges and in the middle of the original
such as a thick books. You can specify the widths individually to erase the
borders around the edges and in the center of the book.

Original

2-28

Copy

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Sending Functions
Individual Border Erase
Specify border erase widths individually for all edges.

Original

Copy

In each option, the available ranges are as below.
Input units

Border Erase Range

Inch models

0 to 2" (in 0.01" increments)

Metric models

0 mm to 50 mm (in 1-mm increments)

Use the procedure below to erase borders when sending scanned
originals.

Place the originals on the platen.

Press the Send key.

Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Border Erase].

Press [Border Erase Sheet] to erase borders for an individual sheet or
[Border Erase Book] to erase borders for a book.
Use [+] or [-] to enter
the width in Border
or Gutter. Press [#
Keys] to use the
number keys for
entry.

Ready to send.

Destination

Enter Destination.

Border Erase
Border

Off

Press [OK] to display
the image.

(0.00 - 2.00)

0.00

Border Erase
Sheet
Border Erase
Book

# Keys
Gutter

Individual
Border Erase

(0.00 - 2.00)

0.00

# Keys
Add Shortcut
Status

Cancel

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [Individual Border Erase] to select the individual border erase.
Use [+] or [-] to enter the border width or press [# Keys] and enter the width
using the numeric keys.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

2-29

Sending Functions
Press [Original
Orientation] to select
the original
orientation from
either [Top Edge
Top] or [Top Edge
Left], and press
[OK].

Ready to send.

Destination

Border Erase
(0.00 - 2.00)

Off

Press [OK] to display
the image.

Top

0.00

Border Erase
Sheet

Bottom

0.00

Border Erase
Book

Left

0.00

Right

0.00

Individual
Border Erase

Top Edge
Top
Original
Orientation

# Keys

Add Shortcut

Cancel

Status

2-30

Place original.

OK
10/5/2006

Press [OK].

Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending.

10:10

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Sending Functions

Enter Document Name/File Name
This setting allows you to assign a document name to scanned images.
You can specify a default for the document name.
Use the procedure below to assign names to scanned documents that you
are sending.

Place the originals on the platen.

Press the Send key.

Press [Advanced Setup] and then [File Name Entry].

Press [File Name].

Ready to send.

Destination

Enter Destination.

File Name Entry
Add a file name.
Additional information such as [Job No.]
and [Date and Time] can also be set.
File Name

Additional Info.

doc

& [ Date and Time]
Job No.

Date and Time

Add Shortcut

Cancel

Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Enter the document name, and press [OK].

NOTE: Up to 30 characters can be entered for the document name.

Press [Job No.] to enter the job No., and [Date and Time] to enter the date
and time.

Press [OK].

Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

2-31

Sending Functions

Enter E-mail Subject and Body
When sending E-mail, enter the subject and body of the E-mail.
Use the procedure below to enter the subject and body for an E-mail
message and then send the E-mail.

Press the Send key.

Press [Advanced Setup] and then [E-mail Subject/Body].

Press [Subject].

Ready to send.

Destination

Enter Destination.

E-mail Subject/Body
Subject

Press [OK] to display

Body

the image.

Add Shortcut

Cancel

Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Enter the subject, and press [OK].

NOTE: Up to 60 characters can be entered for the subject.

Press [Body].

Enter the body and press [OK].

NOTE: Up to 500 characters can be entered for the body.

2-32

Press [OK].

Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Sending Functions

Finish Notice
This feature sends an e-mail providing notification that transmission has
been completed.
Use the procedure below to specify the Finish Notice settings.

Place the originals on the platen.

Press the Send key.

Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Job Finish Notice]

To select the
destination from the
address book, press
[Address Book] on
the left of the screen
and then press
[Address Book] in
the next screen.
Select the
destination to be
notified, then press
[OK].

Ready to send.

Destination

Place original.

Job Finish Notice
Off
Destination

Address Book

Detail

Address
Entry

Detail

Add Shortcut

Address Book

Cancel

Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

You can view information on the notification destination by pressing
[Detail].

Specify the destination to send the finish notice, and press [OK].

NOTE: For the procedure to select the destination from the Address
Book, refer to the Operation Guide.

To directly enter the
address, press
[Address Entry] and
then [E-mail
Address].

Ready to send.

Destination

Place original.

Job Finish Notice
Off
Address Book

E-mail
Address

Address
Entry

Add Shortcut
Status

Enter the E-mail address, and press [OK].

Press [OK].

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Cancel

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

2-33

Sending Functions

Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending.
When the sending is completed, the finish notice is sent to the specified Email address.

2-34

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Sending Functions

Send and Print
When you send originals, this feature allows you to print a copy of the
document being sent.
The procedure for using Send and Print is explained below.

Place the originals on the platen.

Press the Send key.

Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Send and Print].

Press [On].

Ready to send.

Destination

Enter Destination.

Send and Print
Print a copy of documents to be sent.
Press [OK] to display
the image.

Off

Add Shortcut
Status

Cancel

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

Specify the destination and press the Start key. Transmission begins and
a copy of the transmitted document is printed.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

2-35

Sending Functions

Send and Store
When you send originals, this feature allows you to store a copy of the
document being sent in a Document Box.
The procedure for using Send and Store is explained below.

Place the originals on the platen.

Press the Send key.

Press [Advanced Setup], [T], and then [Send and Store].

Press [On].

Ready to send.

Destination

Enter Destination.

Send and Store
Off

Store a copy of documents to be sent
in the document box.

Cancel

Add Shortcut
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Select the Document Box in which the Send and Store copy is to be stored.
If a password entry
screen for the
Document Box
appears, enter the
password.

Ready to send.

Destination

Enter Destination.

Send and Store
Off
On

No.

Box Name
BOX001

0007

BOX002

0008

BOX003

12%

0009

BOX004

16%

Add Shortcut
Status

Use(%)

0006

1/1

Cancel

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

NOTE: The response to password input differs depending on whether or
not user login administration is enabled.
If a password has been set for the Document Box and login administration
is enabled, there is no need to enter the password if the user currently
logged in is the owner of the Document Box. Otherwise, the password
must be entered.
If the current user is not the owner but is logged in with administrator
privileges, there is no need to enter the password.

2-36

Press [OK].

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Sending Functions

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Specify the destination and press the Start key. Transmission begins and
a copy of the transmitted document is stored in the specified Document
Box.

2-37

Sending Functions

2-38

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

3 Printer
This chapter explains the settings for using printer functions by
connecting to the computer using parallel interface or serial
interface (optional) of this machine.
•
•
•
•

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Parallel Interface .......................................................... 3-2
Serial Interface ............................................................. 3-3
Emulation ..................................................................... 3-4
Setting of Other Printers............................................... 3-9

3-1

Printer

Parallel Interface
The parallel interface of this machine supports both bidirectional mode and
high speed mode. Normally, use the default setting [Auto] for parallel
interface.
The table below shows the available settings.
*: Default setting
Item

Detail

Auto*

The mode will be automatically changed
depending on the connected computer.
Normally, no change to the setting is required.

Normal

Communicate by the standard method of
Centronics interface.

High Speed

It is possible to conduct high-speed data transfer
between this machine and the computer. (When
you cannot print properly even after connecting
this machine to the workstation, select this
mode.)

Nibble (High
Speed)

In conformity with IEEE1284 standard, send and
receive data at high speed. It supports
bidirectional communication and enables the
computer to read the status of this machine.

Use the procedure below to select the interface.

Press the System Menu Key.

Press [System] > [Parallel] > [Change].

Select the type of
parallel interface to
be used.

System - Parallel
Select parallel interface type.

Auto

Normal

High Speed

Nibble(High)

Cancel
Status

3-2

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

Press the Power key, and after confirming that the Power key/indicator
and memory indicator have turned off, turn the main power off and on.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Printer

Serial Interface
The serial interface can be mounted as an option. The table below shows
the available settings. Select the setting best suited to the computer's
serial interface.
*: Default setting
Item

Value

Baud Rate

1,200 bps, 2,400 bps, 4,800 bps, 9,600 bps*,
19,200 bps, 38,400 bps, 57,600 bps, 115,200
bps

Data Bits

7 bits, 8 bits*

Stop Bits

1 bit*, 2 bits

Parity

None*, Odd, Even, Ignore

Protocol

DTR (positive), &XOn/XOff*, DTR (positive),
DTR (negative), XOn/XOff, ETX/ACK

Use the procedure below to select the interface.

Press the System Menu Key.

Press [System] > [Serial] > [Change].

Select the baud rate.

System - Baud Rate
Set Baud rate for the serial interface.

1200bps

2400bps

4800bps

38400bps

57600bps

115200bps

9600bps

Cancel
Status

19200bps

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

In the same way as Steps 2 to 4, set the data bits, stop bits, parity and
protocol.

Press the Power key, and after confirming that the Power key/indicator
and memory indicator have turned off, turn the main power off and on.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

3-3

Printer

Emulation
Select the emulation for operating this machine by commands oriented to
other types of printers.
Selection of emulation
The printer can emulate Line Printer, IBM Proprinter, DIABLO 630, EPSON
LQ-850, PCL 6, KC-GL, KPDL and KPDL (Auto).
Use the procedure below to select the emulation.

Press the System Menu Key.

Press [Printer] > [Change] in Emulation.

Select the desired
emulation.

Printer - Emulation
Set emulation options.

Line Printer

IBM
Proprinter

DIABLO 630

EPSON
LQ-850

PCL6

KPDL

KPDL(Auto)

KC-GL

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

NOTE: If you selected [KPDL (Auto)], you should also select an
alternative emulation, as described in Setting of Alternative Emulation
below.
When you have selected [KPDL] or [KPDL (Auto)], set KPDL Error Report,
too. (Refer to page 3-5)
When you have selected [KC-GL], set the print size and pen, too. (Refer to
page 3-7)

3-4

Press [OK].

Press the Power key, and after confirming that the Power key/indicator
and memory indicator have turned off, turn the main power off and on.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Printer
Setting of Alternative Emulation
When you have selected [KPDL (Auto)] as emulation mode, you can switch
between KPDL and another emulation mode (alternative emulation)
automatically according to the data to print. The alternative emulation you
can set is [Line Printer], [IBM Proprinter], [DIABLO 630], [EPSON LQ-850],
[PCL 6]* and [KC-GL] (*: Default setting).
Use the procedure below to select the alternative emulation.

Press the System Menu Key.

Press [Printer] > [Change] in Emulation > [KPDL (Auto)] > [Alternative
Emulation].

Select the desired
alternative
emulation.

Printer - Emulation
Set alternative emulation for KPDL (Kyocera Page Description Language).

Line Printer
PCL6

IBM
Proprinter

DIABLO 630

EPSON
LQ-850
KC-GL

Cancel

Status

10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

Press the Power key, and after confirming that the Power key/indicator
and memory indicator have turned off, turn the main power off and on.

Setting of KPDL error report
When an error has occurred during printing in KPDL emulation mode, set
whether or not the error report is output. The default setting is Off (not
output).
Use the procedure below to specify the KPDL error report setting.

Press the System Menu Key.

Press [Printer] > [Change] in Emulation > [KPDL] or [KPDL (Auto)] > [KPDL
Error Report].

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

3-5

Printer

Press [On] or [Off].

Printer - KPDL Error Report
Print an error report when a KPDL error occurs.

Off

Cancel
Status

3-6

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

Press the Power key, and after confirming that the Power key/indicator
and memory indicator have turned off, turn the main power off and on.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Printer
Setting of page size and pen
When you have selected KC-GL as emulation mode, you can set the page
size, one of eight kinds of pens, and thickness of each pen.
The table below shows the available settings.
*: Default setting
Setting item

Set value

Page Set

B0, B1, B2, B3, A0, A1, A2, Special Size*

Pen Adjust

Pen 1 to Pen 8

1 to 99 dots

NOTE: The default setting of thickness of pen is pen 1:1 dot, pen 2:2
dots, pen 3:3 dots...pen 8:8 dots.
Use the procedure below to select the interface.

Press the System Menu Key.

Press [Printer] > [Change] in Emulation > [KC-GL] > [Page Set].

Select the print size.

Printer - Page Set
Select print size for KC-GL.

Special Size

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

NOTE: [Special Size] is the size designated in Prescribe SPSZ
command. For details of Prescribe command, refer to the Prescribe
Command Reference Manual.

Press [OK]. The previous screen reappears.

Press [Pen Adjust] > [Change] for the pen for which you want to change
the thickness (1 to 8).

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

3-7

Printer

Press [+] or [-] to set
the pen thickness (1
to 99 dots).

Printer - Pen 1
Set the thickness of the pen to use for KC-GL jobs.
Use [-]/[+] or the numeric keys to select thickness.

(1 - 99)
dot(s)

Cancel
Status

3-8

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

You can also enter a value from the number keypad.

Press [OK].

Press the Power key, and after confirming that the Power key/indicator
and memory indicator have turned off, turn the main power off and on.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Printer

Setting of Other Printers
Regarding the setting of other printers, refer to Printer Settings on page 648.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

3-9

Printer

3-10

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

4 Using Document Box
This chapter explains the typical procedure for utilizing
Document Box.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

•

What is Document Box?............................................... 4-2

•
•

Basic Operation for Document Box .............................. 4-5
Using a Job Box ......................................................... 4-22

4-1

Using Document Box

What is Document Box?
Document Box is an area in the hard disk in which you can save
documents for later retrieval or sharing among multiple users.

Different Types of Document Box Components
Document Box contains four types of component boxes which provide the
following functions.
Custom Box
Custom Box is a component box which you can create within the
Document Box and store data for later retrieval. You can create or delete
a Custom Box, and manipulate data in various ways as described below:
•

Creating/Deleting a Custom Box...page 4-5

•

Viewing/Editing a Document in a Custom Box...page 4-14

•

Storing Documents in a Custom Box...page 4-15

•

Moving/Joining/Deleting Documents in a Custom Box...page 4-17

•

Printing a Document in a Custom Box...page 4-18

•

Sending a Document from a Custom Box...page 4-18

Job Box
Job Box holds temporary or permanent print data for use with job options
including Private Print, Stored Job, Quick Copy, Proof and Hold, Repeat
copy and Image Overlay Form which will be discussed later.
Four individual Job Boxes corresponding to these job options are already
provided in the Document Box.
These Job Boxes cannot be created or deleted by a user.
Private Print/Stored Job Box...page 4-22
In Private Printing, you can specify that a job is not printed until you release
the job at the operation panel. When sending the job from the application
software, specify a 4-digit access code in the printer driver.
The job is released for printing by entering the access code on the
operation panel, ensuring confidentiality of the print job.
The data will be deleted upon completion of print job or after the main
power switch is turned off.
In Hold Job, access codes are not mandatory, but can be set on the printer
driver if printing with PIN security is required. In this event, you need to
enter the access code to print the stored jobs. Print data will be stored in
the hard disk after printing. This will allow printing of the same print data
repeatedly.

4-2

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Using Document Box
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Box...page 4-24
Quick Copy feature facilitates additional prints of a document already
printed.
Activating Quick Copy and printing a document using the printer driver
allow the print data to be stored in the Quick Copy Job Box.
When additional copies are required, you can reprint the required number
of copies from the operation panel.
By default, up to 32 documents can be stored.
When power is turned off, all stored jobs will be deleted.

NOTE: When you attempt to store documents in excess of the above
maximum, the oldest document data will be overwritten by the latest
document data.
The Proof and Hold feature produces only a single proof print of multipleprint job and holds printing of the remaining copies.
Printing a multiple-print job in Proof and Hold using the printer driver allows
only a single copy to be printed while maintaining the document data in the
Job Box.
To continue to print the remaining copies, use the operation panel.
You can change the number of copies to print.
Repeat Copy Box...page 4-28
Repeat Copy feature stores the copied original document data in the Job
Box and allows to print additional copies later.
By default, up to 32 documents can be stored.
When power is turned off, the original data will be deleted.

NOTE: Repeat Copy function is not available when the optional security
kit is installed.
Image Overlay Form (Copy) Box...page 4-29
Image Overlay feature copies the original document overlaid with a form or
image.
This Job Box is used to store the forms or images for overlaying.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

4-3

Using Document Box
Removable Memory Box
A USB memory inserted into the USB memory slot of the machine is also
recognizable as a Job Box. This allows printing of the PDF data stored in
the USB memory.
You can print PDF data directly from the USB memory without a PC.
Saving data into the USB memory is not possible.
For details, refer to the Operation Guide.
Fax Box
Fax Box stores the fax data received. For details, refer to the Operation
Guide supplied with the fax kit.

4-4

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Using Document Box

Basic Operation for Document Box
Using Custom Box
This section explains how to create a Custom Box, and how to store a
document in the Custom Box and print it.

NOTE: In the following explanation, it is assumed that User Login is not
activated. For details on User Logon privileges, refer to User Privileges on
page 4-18.
Creating a New Custom Box
Use the procedure below to create a new box in the user box.

Press the Document Box key.

Press [Custom Box],
[Edit Box] and then
[Add].

Custom Box.
No.

Box Name

Owner

Use(%)

001/001

Store File
Custom Box

Job Box

Detail

Open

Removable Memory

Status

To number the
Custom Box, press
[Change] of Box No..

Edit Box

10/5/2006

10:10

Box:**
Box No.:

Change

001
Box Name:

Change

SALES
Box Password:

Change

********
Usage Restriction:
21MB

Change

Auto File Deletion:

Cancel
Status

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Change

30 day(s)

10:10

4-5

Using Document Box

Enter the box
number by pressing
[-, +] or number
keys.
The box number can
be from 0001 to
1000. A Custom Box
should have a
unique number.
If you enter 0000,
the smallest number
available will be
automatically assigned.

Box:** - Box No.
Set box number.
Use [-]/[+] or the numeric keys to enter a number.
Enter 0000 to assign a number automatically.

(0001 - 1000)

0001

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

To name the Custom Box, press [Change] of Box Name.

Enter the box name of up to 32 characters. Press [OK]. For instructions on
how to enter characters, refer to the Operation Guide.

User access to the box can be restricted by specifying a password to
protect the box. Entering a password is not mandatory. Press [Change] of
Box Password.

Press [Password] and enter a password of up to 16 characters. Press [OK].

Press [Confirm Password], enter the same password again and then press
[OK].
When you have finished entering and confirming the password, press [OK].

To preserve the hard disk capacity, the storage capacity for a box can be
restricted. Press [Change] of Usage Restriction.

To enable a capacity
restriction, press
[On]. Enter a value
for the storage
capacity of the
Custom Box in
megabytes by
pressing [-, +] or
number keys.
You can enter a limit
between 1 and
30,000.

Box:** - Usage Restriction
Restrict the number of custom boxes that can be used.
Use [-]/[+] or the numeric keys to enter a number.

Off
On

Usage Restriction(1 - 30000MB)

30
MB

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

To cancel the storage capacity restriction, press [Off].

4-6

Press [OK].

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Using Document Box

To activate automatic file deletion, press [Change] of Auto File Deletion.

This feature
Box:** - Auto File Deletion
automatically deletes
Delete stored documents after a set period of time.
Please set how long to store documents before deleting them.
an unnecessary file
after a period of time
Off
specified. To activate
Storing Period(1 - 31)
On
automatic file deletion,
30 day(s)
press [On]. Enter a
number of days after
which the file will be
automatically deleted
Cancel
by pressing [-, +] or
number keys. The
period of days can be
from 1 to 31. To deactivate the automatic file deletion, press [Off].
Status

Press [OK].

Check the details
you have entered
and then press
[Register]. The
Custom Box is
created.

10:10

Box:**
Box No.:

Change

001
Box Name:

Change

SALES
Box Password:

Change

********
Usage Restriction:

Change

21MB

Auto File Deletion:

Change

30 day(s)

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [Close]. The display returns to the default Document Box screen.

NOTE: If user login is enabled, Owner and Permission are both
displayed and you can change the settings. Refer to Creating new
Custom Boxes when user login administration is enabled on page 4-20.
Storing a Document in the Custom Box
Use the procedure below to select the interface.

Place the original to copy in
the document processor or on
the platen.

NOTE: Refer to the Operation Guide for details on placing originals on the platen.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

4-7

Using Document Box

Select the Custom
Box to store the
document.

Custom Box.
No.

Box Name

001

SALES

Owner

Use(%)

Anonymous

----

001/001

Store File
Custom Box

Job Box

Detail

Open

Removable Memory

Status

Press [Store File].

Edit Box

10/5/2006

10:10

Custom Box.
No.

Box Name

001

SALES

Owner

Use(%)

Anonymous

----

001/001

Store File
Custom Box

Job Box

Detail

Edit Box

Open

Removable Memory

Status

10/5/2006

10:10

NOTE: If the Custom Box is password-protected, enter the password and
press [OK].

Select the type of
originals, scanning
density, etc., as
necessary.

Ready to store in Box.
File Name:** DOC

Storing Image

Box No.:

Set Original.

Owner:

Anonymous

Use(%) :

---

100%
Original : - - Zoom : 100%
Store
: --Preview
Quick Setup
Status

4-8

Box Name: SALES

Zoom
1-sided
2-sided/Book
Original
Functions

Normal 0
Density
Text+Photo
Original
Image

200x200dpi
Fine
Scan
Resolution
Monochrome
Color
Selection
Cancel
10/5/2006

10:10

Press the Start key. The
original is scanned and the
data is stored in the specified
Custom Box.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Using Document Box
Printing a Document Stored in the Custom Box
Use the procedure below to select the interface.

Press the document
box key and select
the custom box
containing the
document you want
to print.

Custom Box.
No.

Box Name

001

SALES

Owner

Use(%)

Anonymous

----

001/001

Store File
Custom Box

Job Box

Detail

Open

Removable Memory

Status

Press [Open].

Edit Box

10/5/2006

10:10

Custom Box.
No.

Box Name

001

SALES

Owner

Use(%)

Anonymous

----

001/001

Store File
Custom Box

Job Box

Detail

Edit Box

Open

Removable Memory

Status

10/5/2006

10:10

NOTE: If the Custom Box is password-protected, enter the password and
press [OK].

Select documents in
the list by checking
the checkbox. The
selected documents
are indicated by a
checkmark.

Custom Box
SALES
Name

Date and Time

Size

001

2006040410574501

04/04/2006 10:57

21 MB

002

2006040410584502

04/04/2006 10:58

12 MB

003

2006040411044503

04/04/2006 11:04

13 MB

001/001

Detail
Preview
Print

Send

Join

Move

Delete

Store File

Close
Status

10/5/2006

10:10

NOTE: To cancel the selection, press the checkbox and remove the
checkmark. Select one document when using [Printing Image], [Booklet],
or [Cover] function.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Press [Print].

4-9

Using Document Box

Change paper
selection, duplex
printing, etc., as
desired.

Ready to print from Box.
Press Start to start printing.

Printing Image

Auto
Original : Letter
Zoom : 100%
Paper : Letter
Change Setting
Quick Setup

Off

Paper
Selection

Delete after
Printed

1-sided
>>1-sided
Duplex

Collate
Collate/
Offset

Functions

Cancel

Status

10/5/2006

10:10

Press the Start key to start
printing.

Overlaying Images from Document Boxes
This function allows you to retrieve images (image files) and overlay
(merge) them onto documents stored in Document Boxes and then print
the results.
The procedure for overlaying images from Document Boxes is explained
below.

Press the Document
Box key and select
the box containing
the document onto
which you want to
overlay the image.

Custom Box.
No.

Box Name

001

SALES

Owner

Use(%)

Anonymous

----

001/001

Store File
Custom Box
Status

4-10

Job Box

Detail

Edit Box

Open

Removable Memory
10/5/2006

10:10

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Using Document Box

Press [Open].

Custom Box.
No.

Box Name

001

SALES

Owner

Use(%)

Anonymous

----

001/001

Store File
Custom Box

Job Box

Detail

Edit Box

Open

Removable Memory

Status

10/5/2006

10:10

NOTE: If a password has been registered for a Custom Box, enter the
password and then press [OK].

Select documents in
the list by checking
the checkbox. The
selected documents
are indicated by a
checkmark.

Custom Box
SALES
Name

Date and Time

Size

001

2006040410574501

04/04/2006 10:57

21 MB

002

2006040410584502

04/04/2006 10:58

12 MB

003

2006040411044503

04/04/2006 11:04

13 MB

001/001

Detail
Preview
Print

Send

Join

Move

Delete

Store File

Close
Status

10/5/2006

10:10

NOTE: To cancel the selection, press the checkbox and remove the
checkmark. Select one document when using [Printing Image], [Booklet],
or [Cover] function.

Press [Print].

Press [Functions],
[Form Overlay],
[Select Stored
Form], and then
[Select Form].

Ready to store in Box.

Copies

Press Start to start printing.
Form Overlay
Density

Off

(10 - 100)
%

Press [OK] to display

Select
Stored Form

the image.

None
Select
Form
Add Shortcut
Status

Cancel

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

NOTE: You can change the form density setting through 10 levels from
10% to 100%. Press the [+] or [-] buttons in Density.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

In Form Overlay - Select Form, select the image file to be overlaid onto the
document.

4-11

Using Document Box
You can only select one image file.

Press [OK].

Press [OK] again to return to the Functions screen.

Press the Start key. Printing begins.

Custom Box List
The Custom Box List is a list of the Custom Boxes you can view on the
display. It lists the boxes by number in ascending or descending order, or
by name in alphabetical order.
This allows you to check the list of custom boxes on screen. The custom
boxes can be listed by box number or by box name.
To view the custom box list, press the document box key.
Listing the boxes by name
in alphabetical order.

Listing the boxes by number in
ascending/descending order.
Custom Box.
No.

Box Name

001

SALES

Owner

Use(%)

Anonymous

----

001/001

Store File
Custom Box
Status

4-12

Job Box

Detail

Edit Box

Open

Removable Memory
10/5/2006

10:10

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Using Document Box

Document List
The document list is a list of the documents stored in the custom box. To
view the contents of a custom box, select the box from the list and press
[Open]. You can manipulate the list in a range of ways, as shown below.
List
Listing the documents by
name in alphabetical order.
Selecting more than
one document at a
time.

Listing the documents by
time of update in ascending/
descending order.

Listing the documents by
size in ascending/
descending order.

Custom Box

Switching to a
thumbnail display.

SALES
Name

Selecting documents
by checking
checkboxes.

Date and Time

Size

2006040410574501

04/04/2006 10:57

21 MB

2006040410585501

04/04/2006 10:58

30 MB
001/001

Highlighting a
document to display its
details with [Detail].
Detail
Preview

Send

Join

Move

Delete

Store File

Close
Status

10/5/2006

10:10

Thumbnail
Custom Box

Selecting more than
one document at a
time.

SALES

Highlighting a
document to display its
details with [Detail].

001/001

Detail

2006040410575501

2006040410575502

Send

Join

2006040410575503

Move

Delete

Preview
Store File

Selecting documents
by checking
checkboxes.

Status

10/5/2006

10:10

Deleting a Custom Box
You can delete boxes. Use the procedure below.

Press the Document Box key.

Press [Edit Box].

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

4-13

Using Document Box

Select the box you
wish to delete in the
list and press
[Delete]. The delete
confirmation screen
appears.

Document Box/Removable Memory - Custom Box
No.
001

Name
SALES

Owner

Use(%)

Anonymous

----

001/001

Detail/Edit

Add

Delete

Close
Status

10/5/2006

10:10

NOTE: If a password has been registered for a custom box, enter the
password and then press [OK].

The box is deleted.

Press [Close]. The display returns to the default Document Box screen.

Viewing/Editing Box Details
You can check and modify box information.
Use the procedure below.

Press the Document Box.

Press [Edit Box].

Highlight the box
you wish to view or
whose details you
wish to edit and
press [Detail/Edit].

Document Box/Removable Memory - Custom Box
No.
001

Name
SALES

Owner

Use(%)

Anonymous

----

001/001

Detail/Edit

Add

Delete

Close
Status

10/5/2006

10:10

NOTE: If a password has been registered for a custom box, enter the
password and then press [OK].

4-14

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Using Document Box

The details of the
selected box are
displayed. To edit
details, press
[Change] of the
detail you wish to
edit. Edit the detail
as desired and press
[OK].

Box:**
Box No.:

Change

001
Box Name:

Change

SALES
Box Password:

Change

********
Usage Restriction:

Auto File Deletion:

Change

21MB

Change

30 day(s)

Cancel

Status

10/5/2006

Press [Register].

Press [Yes] in the deletion confirmation screen.

10:10

The information is changed.

Press [Close]. The display returns to the default Document Box screen.

Storing Documents
A Custom Box can hold up to 1,000 documents. Refer to Storing a
Document in the Custom Box on page 4-7 for details.

Previewing Document Boxes
You can use this function to display a preview of the documents stored in
a Document Box.
The procedure for previewing documents is explained below.

Press the Document
Box key and select
the box containing
the document you
want to preview.

Custom Box.
No.

Box Name

001

SALES

Owner

Use(%)

Anonymous

----

001/001

Store File
Custom Box
Status

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Job Box

Detail

Edit Box

Open

Removable Memory
10/5/2006

10:10

4-15

Using Document Box

Press [Open].

Custom Box.
No.

Box Name

001

SALES

Owner

Use(%)

Anonymous

----

001/001

Store File
Custom Box

Job Box

Detail

Edit Box

Open

Removable Memory

Status

10/5/2006

10:10

NOTE: If a password has been registered for a Custom Box, enter the
password and then press [OK].

Select (highlight) a
document to
preview and then
press [Preview].

Custom Box
SALES
Name

Date and Time

Size

2006040410574501

04/04/2006 10:57

21 MB

2006040410585501

04/04/2006 10:58

30 MB
001/001

Detail
Preview

Send

Join

Move

Delete

Store File

Close
Status

10/5/2006

10:10

To close the preview, press [Close].
When you have zoomed in, you can use
these keys to move the displayed area.

Preview:

2006040410574501
No.

In multiple-page
documents, you
can change
pages by entering
the desired page
number.

1/6

Close
Status

2006/10/10

Zoom out.

4-16

10:10

In multiple-page
documents, you
can use these
buttons to change
pages.

Zoom in.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Using Document Box

Moving/Joining/Deleting Documents
Moving a Document
The documents in a Custom Box can be moved to any other box. Refer to
the Operation Guide for details.
Joining Documents
The documents in a Custom Box can be joined in one document. Refer to
the Operation Guide for details.
Deleting a Document
You can delete the documents stored in a custom box.
Use the procedure below.

Press the Document Box key.

Press [Custom Box]
and choose the box
which contains the
document you wish
to delete.

Custom Box.
No.

Box Name

001

SALES

Owner

Use(%)

Anonymous

----

001/001

Store File
Custom Box

Job Box

Detail

Open

Removable Memory

Status

Press [Open].

Edit Box

10/5/2006

10:10

Custom Box.
No.

Box Name

001

SALES

Owner

Use(%)

Anonymous

----

001/001

Store File
Custom Box
Status

Job Box

Detail

Edit Box

Open

Removable Memory
10/5/2006

10:10

NOTE: If the Custom Box is password-protected, enter the password and
press [OK].

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

4-17

Using Document Box

Select the document
you wish to delete by
checking the
checkbox. The
document is marked
with a checkmark.

Custom Box
SALES
Name

Date and Time

Size

001

2006040411301701

04/04/2006 11:30

21 MB

002

2006040411301702

04/04/2006 11:30

30 MB

003

2006040411301703

04/04/2006 11:30

36 MB

001/001

Edit Box
Preview
Print

Send

Join

Move

Delete

Store File

Close
Status

10/5/2006

10:10

NOTE: [Delete] is disabled until a document is selected. To deselect,
press the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.

Press [Delete]. The delete confirmation screen appears.

Press [Yes] to delete the document.

Printing a Document
To print a document in a Custom Box, refer to the Operation Guide for
details.

Sending a Document
To send a document in a Custom Box, refer to the Operation Guide for
details.

User Privileges
When User Login is activated, accessibility to the Document Box
components will vary depending on the given user privilege.
Accessibilities vary depending on user privilege as follows:
Access level

Administrator

User

Creating a box

Yes

Changing box owner

Yes

Others

Yes

Owner

Yes

Accessibility

Operation

4-18

Deleting a box

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Using Document Box

Access level
Accessibility

Box
information

Administrator

User

Changing box
number

Others

Yes

Owner

Yes

Renaming a box

Others

Yes

Owner

Yes

Changing the
password to a box

Others

Owner

Yes

Overwriting the
password to a box

Others

Yes

Owner

Yes

Adjusting the box
capacity

Others

Yes

Owner

Yes

Changing the owner

Others

Yes

Owner

Yes

Changing the
permisson

Others

Yes

Owner

Yes

Changing the
period of using a
box

Others

Yes

Owner

Yes

Restricting the Accessibility to a Box
The accessibility to a Custom Box differs depending on the level of
privileges as follows:
Administrator: An administrator can gain access and manipulate all
boxes.
User:
A user can gain access and manipulate his/her own boxes
and the shared boxes.

NOTE: A user who is given a network authentication but not registered in
the user list is limited to access the shared boxes only.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

4-19

Using Document Box
Password Entry Requirement
When User Login is activated, requirement of a password differs
depending on the level of privileges as follows:
Administrator: The administrator is not required to enter a password to
gain access to any box.
User:
The user is required to enter a password to gain access to
a box which is protected by a password. The user is not
required to enter a password to gain access to his/her own
boxes.
Creating new Custom Boxes when user login administration is enabled
If you create a new Custom Box when user login administration is enabled,
the screen shown below appears and you can change the owner and
permission settings. Only administrators can create new Custom Boxes.
Box:**
Box No.:

Change

Owner:

Change

Permission:

Change

001
Box Name:

Change

SALES
Box Password:

Change

********
Usage Restriction:
10MB

Shared
Change

Auto File Deletion:

Cancel
Status

Change

07day(s)

10:10

Changing the owner:

Press [Change] in Owner and select the new
owner for the box from the displayed list. Then
press [OK].
Changing the permission:Press [Change] in Permission and select either
[Private] or [Shared]. Then press [OK].

NOTE: For information on specifying other settings, refer to Creating a
New Custom Box on page 4-5.

4-20

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Using Document Box
Working With User Privileges When User Login is Enabled
When user login is enabled, the owner of a box with user privileges set can
change the following box information: the box name, the box password, the
permission and the auto file deletion setting.
Box:**
Box No.:
001

Owner:
DCBA9876

Box Name:
SALES

Change

Box Password:

Change

********
Usage Restriction:
010 MB

Permission:

Change

Shared
Auto File Deletion:
07 day(s)

Cancel
Status

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Change

10:10

4-21

Using Document Box

Using a Job Box
Private Print/Stored Job Box
Private Print/Stored Job Box stores the print data which is printed by using
the printer driver as a Private Print/Stored Job.
Refer to the KX Driver User Guide on how to print a job as Private Print or
Stored Job using the printer driver.
Printing a Document in Private Print/Stored Job Box
You can print documents stored in a Private Print/Stored Job box.
Use the procedure below.

Press the Document Box key.

Press [Job Box].

Select [Private Print/Stored Job] and press [Open].

Select the creator of
the document to
print and press
[Open].

Job Box
Private Print/Stored Job
User Name

Files

User 1

User 2

User 3

User 4

User 5

001/002

1
Open

Close
Status

Select the document
and press [Print].

10/5/2006

10:10

Private Print/Stored Job
Name

Date and Time

Size

Document 0.pdf

10/10/2005 10:10

21 MB

Document 1.pdf

10/10/2005 10:10

30 MB

Document 2.pdf

10/10/2005 10:10

36 MB

Document 3.pdf

10/10/2005 10:10

21 MB

Document 4.pdf

10/10/2005 10:10

30 MB

001/001

Detail

Delete

Close
Status

4-22

10/5/2006

10:10

If the document is protected by a password, enter the password using the
numeric keys.

Specify the number of copies to print as desired.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Using Document Box

Press [Start Print] to start printing.
Upon completion of printing, the Private Print job is automatically deleted.

Viewing a Document
You can check the details of documents stored in a Private Print/Stored
Job box.
Use the procedure below.

Press the Document Box key.

Press [Job Box].

Select [Private Print/Stored Job] and press [Open].

Select the creator of
the document and
press [Open].

Job Box
Private Print/Stored Job
User Name

Files

User 1

User 2

User 3

User 4

User 5

001/002

1
Open

Close
Status

To view the
document, select
the document to
view and press
[Detail].

10/5/2006

10:10

Private Print/Stored Job
Name

Date and Time

Size

Document 0.pdf

10/10/2005 10:10

21 MB

Document 1.pdf

10/10/2005 10:10

30 MB

Document 2.pdf

10/10/2005 10:10

36 MB

Document 3.pdf

10/10/2005 10:10

21 MB

Document 4.pdf

10/10/2005 10:10

30 MB

001/001

Detail

Delete

Close
Status

10/5/2006

10:10

If the document is protected by a password, enter the password using the
numeric keys. Press [OK].

To close the document, press [Close].

Deleting a Document
You can delete documents stored in a Private Print/Stored Job box.
Use the procedure below.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

4-23

Using Document Box

Press the Document Box key.

Press [Job Box].

Select [Private Print/Stored Job] and press [Open].

Select the creator of
the document and
press [Open].

Job Box
Private Print/Stored Job
User Name

Files

User 1

User 2

User 3

User 4

User 5

001/002

1
Open

Close
Status

To delete the
document, select
the document and
press [Delete].
When the delete
confirmation screen
appears, press
[Yes].

10/5/2006

10:10

Private Print/Stored Job
Name

Date and Time

Size

Document 0.pdf

10/10/2005 10:10

21 MB

Document 1.pdf

10/10/2005 10:10

30 MB

Document 2.pdf

10/10/2005 10:10

36 MB

Document 3.pdf

10/10/2005 10:10

21 MB

Document 4.pdf

10/10/2005 10:10

30 MB

001/001

Detail

Delete

Close
Status

10/5/2006

10:10

If the document is protected by a password, enter the password using the
numeric keys and the document is deleted.

Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Print Box
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Box stores the print data which is printed by
using the printer driver as a Quick Copy or Proof and Hold Print job.
Refer to the KX Driver User Guide on how to print a job as Quick Copy or
Proof and Hold Print job using the printer driver.
Setting the Number of Stored Jobs
To maintain free space on the hard disk, you can set the maximum number
of stored jobs.
Use the procedure below to set the number of stored jobs.

4-24

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Document Box/Removable Memory], [Next] of Job Box, then
[Change] of Quick Copy Job Retention.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Using Document Box

Press [+] or [–] to
enter the maximum
number of stored
jobs. You can enter
any number
between 0 and 50.

Document Box/Removable Memory - Quick Copy Job Retention
Set the maximum number of quick copy/proof print jobs to retain.
Use [-]/[+] or the numeric keys to enter a number.
*Set this number to 0 to not retain any quick copy/proof print jobs.

(0 - 50)

job(s)

You can also enter
the number from the
number keypad.
Cancel

Status

10/5/2006

10:10

NOTE: If you enter 0, Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Print feature is not
available.

Press [OK]. The maximum number of stored jobs is set.

Press [Close] repeatedly to return to the initial system menu screen.

Printing a Document
You can print documents stored in the Quick Copy/Proof and Hold box.
Use the procedure below.

Press the Document Box key.

Press [Job Box].

Select [Quick Copy/Proof and Hold] and press [Open].

Select the creator of
the document and
press [Open].

Job Box
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold
User Name

Files

User 1

User 2

User 3

User 4

User 5

001/002

1
Open

Close
Status

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

10/5/2006

10:10

4-25

Using Document Box

Select the document
to print, and press
[Print].

Private Print/Stored Job
Name

Date and Time

Size

Document 0.pdf

10/10/2005 10:10

21 MB

Document 1.pdf

10/10/2005 10:10

30 MB

Document 2.pdf

10/10/2005 10:10

36 MB

Document 3.pdf

10/10/2005 10:10

21 MB

Document 4.pdf

10/10/2005 10:10

30 MB

001/001

Detail

Delete

Close
Status

10/5/2006

Specify the number of prints as desired.

Press [Start Print] to start printing.

10:10

Viewing a Document
You can check the details of documents stored in the Quick Copy/Proof
and Hold box.
Use the procedure below.

Press the Document Box key.

Press [Job Box], [Quick Copy/Proof and Hold], then [Open].

Select the creator of
the document and
press [Open].

Job Box
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold
User Name

Files

User 1

User 2

User 3

User 4

User 5

001/002

1
Open

Close
Status

Select the document
to view and press
[Detail]. The
document can be
viewed.

10/5/2006

10:10

Private Print/Stored Job
Name

Date and Time

Size

Document 0.pdf

10/10/2005 10:10

21 MB

Document 1.pdf

10/10/2005 10:10

30 MB

Document 2.pdf

10/10/2005 10:10

36 MB

Document 3.pdf

10/10/2005 10:10

21 MB

Document 4.pdf

10/10/2005 10:10

30 MB

001/001

Detail

Delete

Close
Status

4-26

10/5/2006

10:10

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Using Document Box

Press [Close] to end viewing.

Deleting a Document
You can delete documents stored in the Quick Copy/Proof and Hold box.
Use the procedure below.

Press the Document Box key.

Press [Job Box], [Quick Copy/Proof and Hold], then [Open].

Select the creator of
the document and
press [Open].

Job Box
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold
User Name

Files

User 1

User 2

User 3

User 4

User 5

001/002

1
Open

Close
Status

Select the document
to delete and press
[Delete].
The delete
confirmation screen
appears.

10/5/2006

10:10

Private Print/Stored Job
Name

Date and Time

Size

Document 0.pdf

10/10/2005 10:10

21 MB

Document 1.pdf

10/10/2005 10:10

30 MB

Document 2.pdf

10/10/2005 10:10

36 MB

Document 3.pdf

10/10/2005 10:10

21 MB

Document 4.pdf

10/10/2005 10:10

30 MB

001/001

Detail

Delete

Close
Status

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

10/5/2006

10:10

Press [Yes]. The document is deleted.

4-27

Using Document Box

Repeat Copy Box
Setting the Number of Stored Jobs
To maintain free space on the hard disk, you can set the maximum number
of stored jobs.
Use the procedure below.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Document Box/Removable Memory], [Next] of Job Box, then
[Change] of Repeat Copy Job Retention.

Use the [+] and [–]
keys or the numeric
keys to enter the
maximum number of
stored jobs.

(0 - 50)

job(s)

You can enter any
number between 0
and 50.
Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

NOTE: If you enter a value of 0 (zero), no jobs are stored.

Press [OK]. The maximum number of stored jobs is set.

Press [Return to Top] repeatedly to return to the initial system menu
screen.

Printing a Document
You can print the documents stored in the Repeat Copy box.
Use the procedure below.

4-28

Press the Document Box key.

Press [Job Box].

Select [Repeat Copy] box, and press [Open].

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Using Document Box

Select the document
to print and press
[Print].

Job Box
Repeat Copy
Name
2006060600531002

Date and Time
06/06/2006 10:10

Size
21 MB

001/001

Detail

Delete

Close
Status

10/5/2006

10:10

If the document is protected by a password, enter the password using the
numeric keys.

Press [Start Print] to start printing.
The Repeat Copy Box job will be deleted when the main power switch is
turned off.

Image Overlay Form (Copy) Box
Storing a Form
You can store forms to be used for image overlay (copy) in the Image
Overlay Form (Copy) box. You can store a 1-page form.
Use the procedure below.

Place the original in the
document processor or on the
platen.

NOTE: Refer to the Operation Guide for details.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Press the Document Box key and [Job Box].

4-29

Using Document Box

Select [Form for
Form Overlay
(Copy)] and press
[Open].

Job Box
Box Name

Files

User

Quick Copy/Proof and Hold

Repeat Copy

21 001/001

Form for Form Overlay(Copy)

Open

Custom Box

Job Box

Removable Memory

Status

Press [Store File].

10/5/2006

10:10

Job Box
Form for Form Overlay(Copy)
Name

Date and Time

Size

2005101000531010

10/10/2005 10:10

21 MB

2005101000531011

10/10/2005 10:10

30 MB
001/001

Detail
Preview
Print

Delete

Store File

Close
Status

10/5/2006

10:10

If necessary, select the type of original, scanning density, etc. before the
original is scanned.

Press the Start key. The
original is scanned and stored
in the [Form for Form Overlay
(Copy)] box.

Copying with an Image Overlay
Refer to Form Overlay on page 1-38 for the procedures to change type and
density of the form preselected in the Image Overlay Form (Copy) box.
Viewing a Stored Form
You can check the details of the form stored in the Image Overlay Form
(Copy) box.
Use the procedure below.

4-30

Press the Document Box key.

Press [Job Box].

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Using Document Box

Select [Form for Form Overlay (Copy)] box, and press [Open].

Select the form to
view and press
[Detail].

Job Box
Form for Form Overlay(Copy)
Name

You can use this
screen to check the
content of the form.

Date and Time

Size

2006040410575501

04/04/2006 10:57

21 MB

2006040410585501

04/04/2006 10:58

30 MB

2006040410594501

04/04/2006 10:59

36 MB

001/001

Detail
Preview

Delete

Store File

Close
Status

10/5/2006

10:10

Press [Close]. This completes form checking.

Deleting a Form Stored
You can delete the form stored in the Image Overlay Form (Copy) box.
Use the procedure below.

Press the Document Box key.

Press [Job Box].

Select [Image Overlay Form (Copy)] and press [Open].

Select the form to
delete and press
[Delete].

Job Box
Form for Form Overlay(Copy)
Name

The delete
confirmation screen
appears.

Date and Time

Size

2006040410575501

04/04/2006 10:57

21 MB

2006040410585501

04/04/2006 10:58

30 MB

2006040410594501

04/04/2006 10:59

36 MB

001/001

Detail
Preview

Delete

Store File

Close
Status

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

10/5/2006

10:10

Press [Yes]. The form is deleted.

4-31

Using Document Box

4-32

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

5 Status / Job Cancel
This chapter explains how to check the status and history of
jobs and cancel the jobs being processed or waiting to be
printed.
This chapter also explains how to check the remaining amount
of toner and paper and the status of devices, and how to
cancel the fax communication.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

•
•
•
•

Checking Job Status..................................................... 5-2
Checking Job History ................................................. 5-10
Pause and Resumption of Jobs ................................. 5-13
Canceling of Jobs....................................................... 5-14

•
•

Priority Override for Waiting Jobs............................... 5-14
Reordering Print Jobs................................................. 5-15

•
•

Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper 5-16
Device/Communication .............................................. 5-17

5-1

Status / Job Cancel

Checking Job Status
Check the status of jobs being processed or waiting to be printed.

Available Status Screens
The processing and waiting statuses of jobs are displayed as a list on the
touch panel in four different screens - Printing Jobs, Sending Jobs,
Sending Jobs - Timer waiting, and Storing Jobs. The following job statuses
are available.
Screen

Job statuses to be displayed

Printing Jobs

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Copy
Printer
FAX reception
i-FAX reception
E-mail reception
Printing from Document Box
Job Report /List
Printing data from removable memory

Sending Jobs

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

FAX transmission
i-FAX transmission
PC (SMB/FTP) transmission
E-mail
TWAIN
Multiple destination
Sending Job FAX using Delayed
transmission

Storing Jobs

•
•
•
•

Scan
FAX
i-FAX
Printer

Displaying Status Screens
Use the procedure below to display the Status screen.

5-2

Press the Status/Job Cancel key.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Status / Job Cancel

Press either of
[Printing Jobs],
[Sending Jobs], or
[Storing Jobs] to
check the status.
To check the
scheduled
transmission job,
press [Sending
Jobs] and then
[Scheduled Job].

Status
Status
Job Type

Scheduled Job

Log

All

Job No.

Accepted Time Type

438

14:47

Destination

User Name

abc@def.com

Status

InProcess

001/001

Cancel

Detail

Printing Jobs
Status

Sending Jobs

Storing Jobs

Device/
Communication

Paper/Supplies

Pausing Scanner.

10/5/2006

10:10

The Status screen appears.
For an explanation of the screen, refer to Details of the Status Screens on
page 5-3.
Details of the Status Screens
The items and keys displayed on the status screens are as follows.
For information on how to display the Status screen, see Displaying Status
Screens on page 5-2.
Printing Jobs Status
Screen

Status
Status
Job Type
Job No.

Log

All
Accepted Time Type

438

14:44

Job Name

User Name

doc20060225144435

Status

Waiting

6
001/001

8
Pause All
Print Jobs
Printing Jobs
Status

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

9
Cancel

Sending Jobs

10
Priority
Override
Storing Jobs

11
Move Up

12
Detail

Device/
Communication

Paper/Supplies
10/5/2006

10:10

5-3

Status / Job Cancel
The table below lists the items displayed in the Printing Jobs Status
screen.
No.

Item / Key

Detail

Job No.

Acceptance No. of job

Accepted Time

Accepted Time of job

Type

Icons that indicate the job type
Copy job
Printer job
FAX reception
i-FAX reception
E-mail reception
Job from Document Box
Report / List
Data from Removable Memory

5-4

Job Name

Job Name or file name

User Name

User Name for the executed job or
Login User Name

Status Name

Status of job
InProcess: The status before
starting to print such as
when scanning originals.
Printing:
Printing
Waiting:
Print Waiting
Pause:
Pausing print job or error
Canceling: Canceling the job

[T] of Job Type

Sorts by specific type of job

[Pause all Print Jobs]

Pauses all the printing jobs. By
pressing this key again, the printing
jobs will be resumed.

[Cancel]

Select the job to be canceled from the
list, and press this key.

[Priority Override]

Select the job to be overridden, and
press this key.
(Refer to Priority Override for Waiting
Jobs on page 5-14)

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Status / Job Cancel

No.

Item / Key

Detail

[Move Up]

In the list, select the job that you want
to move up the job queue and press
this key.
(Refer to Reordering Print Jobs on
page 5-15)

[Detail]

Select the job for displaying detailed
information from the list, and press
this key. (Refer to Checking the
Detailed Information of Histories on
page 5-11)

Sending Jobs Status
screen

Status
Status

Job No.

438

Scheduled Job

Accepted Time Type

14:47

Log

All

Job Type

Destination

User Name

abc@def.com

Status

InProcess

6
001/001

Cancel

Detail

Printing Jobs
Status

Sending Jobs

Storing Jobs

Device/
Communication

Pausing Scanner.

Paper/Supplies
10/5/2006

10:10

The table below lists the items displayed in the Sending Jobs Status
screen.
No.

Item / Key

Detail

Job No.

Acceptance No. of job

Accepted Time

Accepted Time of job

Type

Icons that indicate the job type
Sending Job FAX
Sending Job i-FAX
Sending Job PC (SMB/FTP)
Sending Job E-mail
Sending Job TWAIN
Sending Job Multiple

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Destination

Destination (Either destination name,
FAX number, E-mail address, or
server name)

5-5

Status / Job Cancel

No.

Item / Key

Detail

User Name

User Name for the executed job or
Login User Name.

Status

Status of job
InProcess: The status before
starting sending such as
during scanning
originals
Sending:
Sending
Waiting:
Sending Waiting
Canceling: Canceling the job
Pause:
Pausing the job

[T] of Job Type

Only selected type of jobs are
displayed.

[Cancel]

Select the job you want to cancel from
the list, and press this key.

[Detail]

Select the job whose detailed
information you want to display from
the list, and press this key. (Refer to
Checking the Detailed Information of
Histories on page 5-11)

Storing Jobs Status
screen

Status
Status

Job No.

438

Log

All

Job Type

Accepted Time Type

14:47

Job Name

User Name

Status

doc20060225144758

InProcess

6
001/001

Cancel

Printing Jobs

Detail

Sending Jobs

Storing Jobs

Device/
Communication

Status

Paper/Supplies
10/5/2006

10:10

The table below lists the items displayed in the Storing Jobs Status screen.
No.

5-6

Display / Key

Details

Job No.

Acceptance No. of job

Accepted Time

Accepted Time of job

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Status / Job Cancel

No.
3

Display / Key
Type

Details
Icons that indicate the job type
Storing Job Scan
Storing Job Printer
Storing Job FAX
Storing Job i-FAX

Job Name

Job name or file name is displayed.

User Name

User Name for the executed job or
Login User Name.

Status

Status of job
InProcess: The status before
starting to save such as
during scanning
originals
Storing:
Storing Data
Canceling: Canceling the job

[T] of Job Type

Only selected type of jobs are
displayed.

[Cancel]

Select the job you want to cancel from
the list, and press this key.

[Detail]

Select the job whose detailed
information you want to display from
the list, and press this key. (Refer to
Checking the Detailed Information of
Histories on page 5-11)

Checking the Detailed Information of Jobs
Check the detailed information of each job.
Use the procedure below to select the interface.

Press the Status/Job Cancel key.

Press [Printing Jobs], [Sending Jobs], or [Storing Jobs].
To check the scheduled transmission, press [Sending Jobs] and then
[Scheduled Job].

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Select the job whose details you wish to check from the list, and press
[Detail].

5-7

Status / Job Cancel
Detailed information
of the selected job is
displayed.

Status
Status
Job Type
Job No.

Log

All
Accepted Time Type

438

14:44

Job Name

User Name

doc20060225144435

Status

Waiting

001/001

Pause All
Print Jobs
Printing Jobs

Cancel

Priority
Override

Sending Jobs

Move Up

Storing Jobs

Detail

Device/
Communication

Paper/Supplies

Status

10/5/2006

10:10

Detailed information on the selected job is displayed.
Use [T] or [S] to
see the next or
previous page of
information.

Detail Job No.:

000080

Job No.:

Status:

000080

Processing

Job Type:

Destination:

Sending Job - E-mail

Detail

ABCDE

User Name:
User01
Job Name:
doc20060404115151
Accepted Time:
11:51:51

1/2

In Sending Jobs,
you can check the
destination by
pressing [Detail] in
Destination or
Status/Destination.

Detail Job No.:

000080

Job No.:

Status:

000080

Processing

Job Type:

Destination:

Sending Job - E-mail

Detail

ABCDE

User Name:
User01
Job Name:
doc20060404115151
Accepted Time:
11:51:51

1/2

Status/Destination is
displayed when
multiple addresses
are selected. Press
[Detail] to display the
list.

Detail Job No.:

000081

Job No.:
000081
Job Type:
Sending Job - E-mail

Status/Destination:

Detail

Waiting
Destination:
5

User Name:
User01
Job Name:
doc20060404131415
Accepted Time:
13:14:15

1/2

5-8

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Status / Job Cancel

NOTE: Press [T] or [S], select a destination and press [Detail].
Information on the selected job is displayed for checking.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

To exit from the detailed information, press [Close].

5-9

Status / Job Cancel

Checking Job History
Check the history of completed jobs.

NOTE: Job history is also available by COMMAND CENTER or KM-NET
VIEWER from the computer.

Available Job History Screens
The job histories are displayed separately in three screens - Printing Jobs,
Sending Jobs, and Storing Jobs. The following job histories are available.
Screen

Job histories to be displayed

Printing Jobs

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Copy
Printer
FAX reception
i-FAX reception
E-mail reception
Printing from Document Box
Job Report / List
Printing data from removable
memory

Sending Jobs

•
•
•
•
•
•

FAX
i-FAX
PC (SMB/FTP)
E-mail
TWAIN
Multiple destination

Storing Jobs

•
•
•
•

Scan
FAX
i-FAX
Printer

Displaying Job History Screen
The procedure for displaying Job History Screen is explained below.

5-10

Press the Status/Job Cancel key.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Status / Job Cancel

Press either of
[Printing Jobs],
[Sending Jobs], or
[Storing Jobs] to
check the log, and
press [Log].

Status
Status

Log

All

Job Type
Job No.

Date

Type

Job Name

User Name

Result

000080 01/25 14:14

doc20060225141427

000081 01/25 14:22

doc20060225142253

000082 01/25 14:21

doc00100043520060225142110

000083 01/25 14:23

doc20060225142358

000084 01/25 14:50

doc20060225145034

001/001

OK
Detail

Printing Jobs
Status

Sending Jobs

Device/
Communication

Storing Jobs

Paper/Supplies

Executing TX job **.

10/5/2006

10:10

Checking the Detailed Information of Histories
Check the detailed information of each history.
Display of the detailed information of Job Finish history
Use the procedure below to select the interface.

Press the Status/Job Cancel key.

Press [Printing Jobs], [Sending Jobs] or [Storing Jobs] and then [Log].

Select the job to check details from the list, and press [Detail].
Detailed information
of the selected job is
displayed.

Status
Status

Log

All

Job Type
Job No.

Date

Type

Job Name

User Name

Result

000080 01/25 14:14

doc20060225141427

000081 01/25 14:22

doc20060225142253

000082 01/25 14:21

doc00100043520060225142110

000083 01/25 14:23

doc20060225142358

000084 01/25 14:50

doc20060225145034

001/001

OK
Detail

Printing Jobs
Status

Sending Jobs

Device/
Communication

Storing Jobs

Paper/Supplies

Executing TX job **.

10/5/2006

10:10

Detail Job No.: 000091
Job No.:

Result:

000091

Job Type:
Printing Job - Copy
User Name:
ABCDE
Job Name:
doc20060404135151
Accepted Time:
13:51:51

End Time:
13:52:25

1/2

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

5-11

Status / Job Cancel

NOTE: To check the information of the next/previous page, press [T] or
[S].

5-12

To exit from the detailed information, press [Close].

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Status / Job Cancel

Pause and Resumption of Jobs
Pause /resume all printing jobs in printing/waiting.
The procedure for pausing and resuming jobs is explained below.

Press the Status/Job Cancel key.

Press [Pause All
Print Jobs] on the
Printing Jobs Status
screen. Printing is
paused.

Status
Status

Job No.

Log

All

Job Type

Accepted Time Type

Job Name

User Name

Status

000081

14:21

doc20060506142153

AAAAA

InProcess

000082

14:22

doc20060506142210

AAAAA

Waiting
001/001

Pause All
Print Jobs

Cancel

Printing Jobs

Priority
Override

Sending Jobs

Move Up

Storing Jobs

Detail

Device/
Communication

Paper/Supplies

Status

When resuming the
printing of jobs that
have been paused,
press [Resume All
Print Jobs].

10/5/2006

10:10

Status
Status
Job Type
Job No.

Log

All
Accepted Time Type

438

14:44

Job Name

User Name

doc20060225144435

Status

Pause

001/001

Resume All
Print Jobs
Printing Jobs
Status

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Cancel

Sending Jobs

Priority
Override
Storing Jobs

Move Up

Detail

Device/
Communication

Paper/Supplies
10/5/2006

10:10

5-13

Status / Job Cancel

Canceling of Jobs
For more information on cancelling jobs, refer to the Operation Guide.

Priority Override for Waiting Jobs
Priority Override function suspends the current job and prints the job in
waiting first.

NOTE: A current job that is designated as Priority Override cannot be
suspended. After the current Priority Override job is completed, the next
Priority Override job is printed.
The procedure for using Priority Override is explained below.

Press the Status/Job Cancel key.

Press [Printing Jobs].

Select the job to be
given priority, and
press [Priority
Override].

Status
Status

Job No.

Log

All

Job Type

Accepted Time Type

Job Name

User Name

Status

000081

14:21

doc20060506142153

AAAAA

InProcess

000082

14:22

doc20060506142210

AAAAA

Waiting
001/001

Pause All
Print Jobs
Printing Jobs
Status

5-14

Cancel

Priority
Override

Sending Jobs

Storing Jobs

Move Up

Detail

Device/
Communication

Paper/Supplies
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [Yes] in the confirmation screen. The current job in printing is
suspended, and the job for override printing starts.

When the Priority Override is completed, the printing job that has been
suspended will be resumed.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Status / Job Cancel

Reordering Print Jobs
This function allows you to select a queued print job and raise its output
priority.

NOTE: You cannot assign a higher priority than the job currently being
printed or jobs that have been queued due to an interruption. Nor can you
assign a priority higher than a job being processed.
You cannot lower a job's priority.
The procedure for reordering print jobs is explained below.

Press the Status/Cancel key.

Press the [Printing Jobs].

Select the job to be
assigned a higher
priority and press
[Move Up].
The priority of the
selected job is
increased by 1 .
To further raise the
job's priority, press
[Move Up] again.
Each time you press
[Move Up], the
priority increases by 1.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Status
Status

Job No.

Log

All

Job Type

Accepted Time Type

Job Name

User Name

Status

000081

14:21

doc20060506142153

AAAAA

InProcess

000082

14:22

doc20060506142210

AAAAA

Waiting
001/001

Pause All
Print Jobs
Printing Jobs
Status

Cancel

Sending Jobs

Priority
Override
Storing Jobs

Move Up

Detail

Device/
Communication

Paper/Supplies
10/5/2006

10:10

5-15

Status / Job Cancel

Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper
Check the remaining amount of toner, paper, and staples on the touch
panel.
Use the procedure below to select the interface.

Press the Status/Job Cancel key.

Press [Paper/
Supplies] to check
the remaining
amount of toner,
paper, and staples.

Detail

Toner Information
Toner

Black(K)
Waste Toner OK

Printing Jobs

Paper
Status

Others
Size

Type

Ledger
Ledger

Plain

Status

Type

Status

Staple A

Plain

30%
30%

Staple B

No Staples

Letter

Plain

30%

Punch waste

Letter
Letter

Plain
Plain

30%
0%

Sending Jobs

Storing Jobs

Device/
Communication

Paper/Supplies
10/5/2006

Status

10:10

The items you can check are described below.
Remaining amount of toner
You can check the remaining amount of toner as one of 11 levels from 100
to 0%.
Status of waste toner box
You can check the status of waste toner box.
Paper
You can check the size, orientation, type, and remaining amount of paper
in each paper source.
Others
You can check the status of staples and punch waste box.

5-16

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Status / Job Cancel

Device/Communication
Configure the devices/lines installed or connected to this machine or check
their status. You can also control devices depending on their status.

Displaying Device/Communication Screen
The procedure for using the Device/Communication screen is explained
below.

Press the Status/Job Cancel key.

Press [Device/Communication]
The screen to check the status or configure the devices is displayed.

Check of Device Status

Detail
Scanner
Ready.

Hard Disk
Error has occurred.

Printer
Ready.

FAX Backup Memory

Removable Memory

Memory Card

Not connected.

Safely removable.
Format

Remove

Display
Error

Format

Printing list

FAX Port 1
Communicating...
Line Off

Manual RX

FAX

Log

Printing Jobs
Log

Sending Jobs

Storing Jobs

Executing TX job **.

Device/
Communication

Paper/Supplies
10/5/2006

10:10

The items you can check are described below.

Scanner
The status of an original scanning in the document processor (optional) or
the error information (paper jam, opened cover, etc.) is displayed.
Printer
Error information such as paper jam, out of toner, or out of paper, and
status such as waiting or printing are displayed.
Hard Disk
The information such as formatting, overwriting for erasure, and error
occurrence is displayed.
FAX Backup Memory
Usage and capacity of the optional data backup kit are displayed.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

5-17

Status / Job Cancel

Configuring the Devices

Detail
Scanner
Ready.

Hard Disk
Error has occurred.

Printer
Ready.

FAX Backup Memory

Removable Memory

Memory Card

Not connected.

Safely removable.
Format

Display
Error

Remove

Format

Printing list

FAX Port 1
Communicating...
Line Off

Manual RX

FAX

Log

Printing Jobs
Log

Sending Jobs

Storing Jobs

Device/
Communication

Executing TX job **.

Paper/Supplies
10/5/2006

10:10

Detailed information on controlling devices is given below.

Removable Memory (USB Memory)
•

The usage and capacity of the external media connected to this
machine are displayed.

•

Press [Format] to format external media.

•

Press [Remove] to safely remove the external media. For details, refer
to Removing the USB Memory in the next section.

FAX Port 1, FAX Port 2
•

The information such as sending/receiving and dialing is displayed.

•

Press [Line Off] to cancel a fax in sending/receiving. For details, refer
to Canceling FAX Communication on page 5-19 in the section
afterwards.

•

Press [Manual RX] to start a fax. Use this function when you want to
talk to the sender before receiving the fax originals. For details, refer to
the Operation Guide of FAX kit.

•

Press [Log] to display the fax transmission history. For details, refer to
the Operation Guide of FAX kit.

Format (memory for printer, Compact Flash)
•

The information such as cannot recognize or unconnected and the
usage/capacity of memory card are displayed.

•

Press [Format] to format the memory card.

•

Press [Printing list] to print the partition list. For details, refer to Print of
Partition List.

Removing the USB Memory
There is a way to remove the USB memory safely.
Use the procedure below.

5-18

Press the Status/Job Cancel key.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Status / Job Cancel

Press [Device/
Communication] >
[Remove] in
Removable
Memory.

Detail
Scanner
Ready.

Hard Disk
Error has occurred.

Printer
Ready.

FAX Backup Memory

Removable Memory

Memory Card

Not connected.

Safely removable.
Format

Remove

Display
Error

Format

Printing list

FAX Port 1
Communicating...
Line Off

Manual RX

FAX

Log

Printing Jobs
Log

Sending Jobs

Storing Jobs

Device/
Communication

Executing TX job **.

Paper/Supplies
10/5/2006

10:10

When Device can be removed safely is displayed, remove the USB
memory.

Canceling FAX Communication
Cancel fax communication.
Use the procedure below to select the interface.

Press the Status/Job Cancel key.

Press [Device/
Communication] >
[Line Off] in Fax Line
1.

Status
Scanner
Ready.

Hard Disk
Error has occurred.

Printer

FAX Backup Memory

Ready.

Not connected.

Removable Memory

Memory Card

Not connected.
Format

Not connected.
Remove

Format

Ready.

Line Off

Manual RX

FAX

Line Off

Log

Printing Jobs
Status

Printing list

FAX Port 2

FAX Port 1

FAX/i-FAX
Sending Jobs

Storing Jobs

Device/
Communication

Executing TX job **.

Check New FAX
Paper/Supplies
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [Yes] in the confirmation screen. The line is disconnected, and the
fax communication is canceled.

Printing Partition List
Print the partition list of the memory for printer (Memory Card).
Use the procedure below to print the partition list.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Press the Status/Job Cancel key.

5-19

Status / Job Cancel

Press [Device/
Communication] >
[Printing list] in
Memory Card.

Detail
Scanner
Ready.

Hard Disk
Error has occurred.

Printer
Ready.

FAX Backup Memory

Removable Memory

Memory Card

Not connected.

Safely removable.
Format

Display
Error

Remove

Format

Printing list

FAX Port 1
Communicating...
Line Off

Manual RX

FAX

Log

Printing Jobs
Log

Sending Jobs

Storing Jobs

Device/
Communication

Executing TX job **.

Paper/Supplies
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [Yes] in the confirmation screen. List printing begins.

NOTE: When the job accounting is enabled, the list may not be printed.
For details, refer to page 7-16.

5-20

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

6 System Menu
This chapter explains how to configure various settings of the
machine using the menus on the operation panel.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

•

Return to Top on the System Menu.............................. 6-2

•
•
•
•
•

Common Settings......................................................... 6-2
Copy Settings ............................................................. 6-38
Sending Settings ........................................................ 6-44
Document Box/Removable Memory Settings............. 6-46
Printer Settings........................................................... 6-48

•

Network Setup............................................................ 6-56

•
•

Printing Reports/Sending Notice ................................ 6-59
Adjustment/Maintenance............................................ 6-63

•
•

Date/Timer.................................................................. 6-70
Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One-Touch

•

Keys) .......................................................................... 6-76
System Initialization.................................................... 6-85

•
•
•

Restarting the System ................................................ 6-86
SSL Network Security ................................................ 6-87
Accessibility (Enlarged Touch Panel Display) ............ 6-88

6-1

System Menu

Return to Top on the System Menu
[Return to Top] appears in the screen during System Menu operation.
Press [Return to
Top] to return to the
System Menu
default screen.
Return to the
System Menu
default screen
before operating
other functions
during System Menu
operation.

Common Settings - Buzzer
Volume:
3 Medium

Change

Key Confirmation:
Off

Change

Job Finish:
Off

Change

Ready:
On

Change

Warning:
Off

Change

Return to Top
End

Close
10/ 5/2006

10:10

NOTE: During the System Menu operation, pressing the System Menu
key does not return to the System Menu default screen.

Common Settings
Common settings include;
•

Switching the Language for Display [Language] …6-2

•

Default Screen …6-3

•

Sound …6-5

•

Original/Paper Setup …6-6

•

Switching Unit of Measurement …6-17

•

Error Handling …6-17

•

Output Tray …6-20

•

Function Defaults …6-21

•

Orientation Confirmation …6-37

NOTE: If user login is enabled, you can only change the settings by
logging in with administrator privileges.

Switching the Language for Display [Language]
Select the language displayed on the touch panel.
Use the procedure below to select the language.

6-2

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Common Settings] and then [Change] of Language.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

System Menu

Press the key for the
language you want
to use.

Common Settings - Language
Set the language to use for the touch panel display.

English

Deutsch

Português

Nederlands

Français

Español

Italiano

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

A message instructing you to turn the power off and on appears. Press
[OK].

Press the Power key on the operation panel. Check that the Power key
and the memory indicator are off. After this, turn on the main power switch
again.
The touch panel language will be changed.

Default Screen
Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen). The
options are as follows.
The table below lists the available screens.
Item

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Description

Copy

The Copy screen (the screen shown when the
Copy key is pressed) appears.

Send

The Send screen (the screen shown when the
Send key is pressed) appears.

Status

The Status/Job Cancel screen (the screen shown
when the Status/Job Cancel key is pressed)
appears.

Document Box

The Document Box screen (the screen shown
when the Document Box key is pressed)
appears.

Program

The Program screen (the screen shown when
the Program key is pressed) appears.

Application

The Application screen (the screen shown when
the Application key is pressed) appears.

Accessibility Copy

The Accessibility Copy screen (the screen shown
when the Accessibility Display key is pressed
in the Copy screen) appears.

6-3

System Menu

Item

Description

Accessibility Send

The Accessibility Send screen (the screen shown
when the Accessibility Display key is pressed
in the Send screen) appears.

Use the procedure below to select the default startup screen.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Common Settings] and then [Change] of Default Screen.

Select the screen to
be displayed as the
default screen.

Common Settings - Default Screen
Set the default screen to be displayed when main power switch is turned on.

Copy

English
Send

Status

Document Box

Program

Application
Accessibility
Copy

Accessibility
Send

Cancel
Status

6-4

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

System Menu

Sound
Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations.
The table below lists the buzzer types and their settings and details.
Item

Value

Description

Volume

0 (Mute), 1 (Minimum)
to
5 (Maximum)

Set the buzzer volume
level.

Key
Confirmation

Off, On

Emit a sound when the
control panel and touch
panel keys are pressed.

Job Finish

Off, On

Emit a sound when a print
job is normally completed.

Ready

Off, On

Emit a sound when the
warm-up is completed.

Warning

Off, On

Emit a sound when errors
occur.

Use the procedure below to set the sound options.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Sound and then [Next] of Buzzer.

Press [Change] of
Volume, Key
Confirmation, Job
Finish, Ready, or
Warning.

Common Settings - Buzzer
Volume:
3 Medium

Change

Key Confirmation:
Off

Change

Job Finish:
Off

Change

Ready:
On

Change

Warning:
Off

Change

Return to Top
End

Select the buzzer volume level, or other sound options.

Press [Close].

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Close
10/ 5/2006

10:10

6-5

System Menu

Original/Paper Setup
Register additional types and sizes of originals and paper.
Custom Original Size Setup
Set up frequently-used custom original sizes. The custom size options are
displayed on the screen to select original size. The dimensions available
are as follows.
The table below lists the sizes that can be registered.
Input units

Dimensions

Inch models

X: 2 to 17" (in 0.01" increments)
Y: 2 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)

Metric models

X: 50 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Y: 50 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Up to four custom original sizes can be added. Use the procedure below
to select the interface.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original/Paper Setup and then [Next]
of Custom Original Size.

Press [Change] of any one of Custom 1 to Custom 4, on which you wish to
register the size.

Press [On], and then
press [+], [–] or
numeric keys to
enter X (horizontal)
and Y (vertical)
dimensions.

Common Settings - Custom 1
Register a custom original size.

Off

X(2.00 - 17.00)

17.00

On
# Keys
Y(2.00 - 11.69)

11.69

# Keys

Cancel
Status

Paper is remaining in Document Processor.

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print
Set up a maximum of four frequently-used custom paper sizes. The
custom size options are displayed on the screen to select paper set in the
Multi Purpose tray.

6-6

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

System Menu
The table below lists the sizes that can be registered.
Input units

Dimensions

Inch models

H: 5.83 to 17" (in 0.01" increments)
V: 5.86 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)

Metric models

H: 148 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments)
V: 98 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Up to four custom paper sizes can be added.
Select media type for each paper size.
Media type: Plain, Transparencies, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprint,
Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, Envelope, High
Quality, Custom 1-8

NOTE: Refer to Paper Weight on page 6-10 for Custom 1- 8 for media
type.
Use the procedure below to select a custom paper size and media type.

Press the System Menu key

Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original/Paper Setup and then [Next]
of Custom Paper Size.

Press [Change] of any one of Custom 1 to Custom 4, on which you want
to register the size.

Press [On], and then
press [+], [–] or
numeric keys to
enter X (horizontal)
and Y (vertical)
dimensions.

Common Settings - Custom 1
Register a custom paper size and type.

Off

17.00
On

"
# Keys

Plain

11.69

"
Media Type
# Keys

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [Media Type] to select the type of paper and press [OK] if necessary.

Press [OK].

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

6-7

System Menu
Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Cassettes
Select paper size and media type for Cassette 1, 2 and optional paper
feeders (Cassette 3 and 4). Select only media type for the optional 3000
sheet paper feeder (Cassette 3).
The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below.
Item
Paper
Size

Description

Auto

Automatically detect paper size. Select Metric or
Inch for paper size.

Standard
Sizes 1

Available options are as follows:
Inch models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R,
Statement-R, 8.5×13.5", Oficio II
Metric models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R,
A5-R, Folio

Standard
Sizes 2

Select a standard size except that selected in
Standard Sizes 1.
Inch models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B5, B5-R,
Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R
Metric models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R,
Statement-R, 8.5×13.5", Oficio II, 8K, 16K,
16K-R

Media Type

Plain, Rough, Vellum, Recycled, Preprint, Bond,
Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick,
High Quality, Custom

Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type for each
cassette.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Setup, [Next] of
Cassette Setting, [Next] of Cassette 1 to Cassette 4, on which you want to
register the size, and then [Change] of Paper Size.

To detect paper size automatically, press [Auto] and select Metric or Inch
for Paper Size.
To select paper size,
press [Standard
Sizes 1] or
[Standard Sizes 2]
for Paper Size.

Common Settings – Paper Size
Set cassette papersize.

Auto

Standard
Sizes 1

Folio

Standard
Sizes 2

Cancel
Status

6-8

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

System Menu

Press [OK]. The previous screen reappears.

Press [Change] of Media Type to select media type and press [OK].

Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Multi Purpose Tray
Select size and media type for Multi Purpose Tray. Set up frequently-used
size and media type before use.
The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below.
Item
Paper
Size

Auto

Automatically detect paper size. Select Metric or
Inch for paper size.

Standard
Sizes 1

Available options are as follows:
Inch models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R,
Statement-R, 8.5×13.5", Oficio II, Executive
Metric models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R,
A5-R, B6-R, A6-R, Folio

Standard
Sizes 2

Select a standard size except that selected in
Standard Sizes 1.
Inch models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R,
B6-R, A6-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R
Metric models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R,
Statement-R, 8.5×13.5", Oficio II, Executive, 8K,
16K, 16K-R

Others

Select special standard sizes or custom sizes*.
ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope
#6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope
C5, Envelope C4, Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki,
Youkei 4, Youkei 2

Size
Entry

Enter a size not displayed in the standard sizes.
Inch models:
H: 5.83 to 17" (in 0.01" increments)
V: 3.86 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric models:
V: 98 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)
H: 148 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Media Type

*
**

Description

Plain, Transparencies, Rough, Vellum, Labels,
Recycled, Preprint, Bond, Cardstock, Color,
Prepunched, Letterhead, Envelope, Thick, High
Quality, Custom 1-8**

Refer to Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print on
page 6-6 for selecting Custom 1- 4 for Custom Paper Size.
Refer to Paper Weight on page 6-10 for selecting Custom 1- 8 from
Media Type.

Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type for
manual paper feed.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

6-9

System Menu

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original/Paper Setup, [Next] of MP
Tray Setting and then [Change] of Paper Size.

To detect paper size automatically, press [Auto] and select Metric or Inch
for Paper Size.
To select paper size,
press [Standard
Sizes 1], [Standard
Sizes 2], [Others] or
[Size Entry] for
Paper Size.

Common Settings – Paper Size
Set the multi-purpose tray paper size.

Auto

Standard
Sizes 1

Standard
Sizes 2

Folio

Others
Size Entry

Cancel
Status

If you select [Size
Entry], press [+], [–]
to enter X
(horizontal) and Y
(vertical)
dimensions.

Paper is remaining in Document Processor.

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Common Settings – Paper Size
Set the multi-purpose tray paper size.

X(148 - 432)

Auto

432
Standard
Sizes 1
Standard
Sizes 2
Others

mm
# Keys

Y(98 - 297)

297

Size Entry

mm
# Keys

Cancel
Status

Paper is remaining in Document Processor.

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK]. The previous screen reappears.

Press [Change] of Media Type to select the media type and press [OK].

Paper Weight
Select weight for each media type. The options for media type and weight
of paper are as follows.

6-10

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

System Menu
Paper types and weights
z: Available ×: Not available
Paper Weight
Weight (g/m2),

Media type

Light
64g/m2
or less

Normal 1

Normal 2

Normal 3

Heavy 1

Heavy 2

Heavy 3

Extra
Heavy

60g/m2
to
75g/m2

76g/m2
to
90g/m2

91g/m2
to
105g/m2

106g/m2
to
135g/m2

136g/m2
to
170g/m2

171g/m2
and more

Transparencies

Plain

Transparencies

Vellum

Labels

Recycled

Preprint

Bond

Cardstock

Color

Prepunched

Letterhead

Thick

Envelope

High Quality

Custom 1-8

For Custom 1-8, settings for duplex printing and media type name can be
changed.
Item
Duplex

Name

Description

Prohibit

Duplex printing not allowed.

Permit

Duplex printing allowed.
Change names for Custom 1-8. Names
should be not more than 15 characters.
Selecting media type at Multi Purpose Tray,
the name after change will be displayed.

Use the procedure below to set the paper weight.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

6-11

System Menu

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original/Paper Setup and then [Next]
of Media Type Setting.

Press [Next] for the media type whose weight you want to change.

NOTE: OHP Transparencies is not displayed.

Press [Change] of Media Weight.

Select the weight
and press [OK].
The previous screen
reappears.

Common Settings - Media Weight
Select weight of paper.
Please refer to the manual for details.

Extra Heavy

Heavy 3

Heavy 2

Normal 2

Normal 1

Light

Heavy 1

Normal 3

Cancel
Status

To change the
duplex printing
settings for Custom
1 (-8), press
[Change] of Duplex,
select [Prohibit] or
[Permit] and press
[OK].

10:10

Common Settings - Duplex
Allow duplex printing.

Prohibit

The previous screen
reappears.

Permit

Cancel

OK
10/5/2006

Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

To change the name for Custom 1(-8), press [Change] of Name to enter
the name and press [OK].

NOTE: Refer to the Operation Guide for entering characters.

6-12

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

System Menu
Default Paper Source
Select the default paper source from Cassette 1-4 and Multi Purpose Tray.

NOTE: [Cassette 3] and [Cassette 4] are displayed when the optional
side feeders or optional 3000 sheet paper feeder installed.
Use the procedure below to select the default paper source.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original/Paper Setup and then
[Change] of Default Paper Source.

Select a paper
cassette for the
default setting.

Common Settings - Default Paper Source
Select paper cassette for default setting.

Cassette 1

Cassette 2

Cassette 3

Cassette 4

Multi Purpose
Tray

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

Automatic Detection of Originals
Automatically detect originals of special or non-standard size.
The table below lists the special or non-standard original sizes.
Item

Description

A6/Hagaki

As A6 and Hagaki are similar in size, select
either one of them for automatic detection.

Folio

Select Folio for automatic detection.

11×15"

Select the 11×15" size for automatic
detection.

Use the procedure below to set automatic detection of originals.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original/Paper Setup and then
[Change] of Original Auto Detect.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

6-13

System Menu

Select [A6] or [Hagaki] of A6/Hagaki.
Select [Off] to
disable automatic
detection or [On] to
enable automatic
detection of Folio
and 11×15"
respectively.

Common Settings - Original Auto Detect Setup
Automatically detect originals of special or non-standard size.

A6/Hagaki

Hagaki

Folio

Off

11x15"

Off

Cancel

Status

10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

Media for Auto Selection
Select a default media type for auto paper selection when [Auto] is
selected of Paper Selection. If Plain is selected, the paper source with plain
paper loaded in the specific size is selected. Select [All Media Type] for the
paper source with any kind of paper loaded in the specific size.
Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type used by
Auto Selection.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original/Paper Setup and then
[Change] of Media for Auto Selection.

Select [All Media
Types] or any media
type for paper
selection.

Common Settings - Media for Auto Selection
Select default type of paper for auto paper selection.

All Media
Types

Plain

Transparency

Rough

Vellum

Labels

Recycled

Preprinted

Bond

Cardstock

Color

Prepunched

Letterhead

Envelope

Thick

High Quality

Custom 1

Custom 2

Custom 3

Custom 4

Custom 5

Custom 6

Custom 7

Custom 8

Cancel
Status

6-14

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

System Menu
Paper Source for Cover Paper
Select paper source for cover paper from Cassette 1-4 or Multi Purpose
Tray. Cover is used for Booklet (see page 1-37) and Cover (see page 130) modes.

NOTE: [Cassette 3] and [Cassette 4] are displayed when the optional
side feeders or optional 3000 sheet paper feeder installed.
Use the procedure below to select the paper source for the cover.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original/Paper Setup and then
[Change] of Paper Source for Cover.

Select the paper
source to load cover
paper.

Common Settings - Paper Source for Cover
Select cassette for cover paper.

Cassette 1

Cassette 2

Cassette 3

Cassette 4

Multi Purpose
Tray

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

Special Paper Action
When printing on Prepunched, Preprint, and Letterhead, punch-holes
might not be aligned or the print direction might be upside-down depending
on how originals are set and the combination of copying functions. In such
a case, select [Adjust Print Direction] to adjust the print direction. When
paper orientation is not important, select [Speed Priority].
The table below lists the available settings and their details.
Item

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Description

Adjust Print Direction

Adjust print direction. Print speed is a little
slower. Select this item to print on
Prepunched, Preprint and Letterhead.

Speed Priority

Give the job speed top priority and
disregard the paper orientation. Select this
item when paper orientation is not
important.

6-15

System Menu
If you select [Adjust Print Direction], load paper according to the steps
below.
Example: copying on Letterhead

Original

Paper

Finished

Cassette

Multi Purpose tray

Original

Paper

Finished

Cassette

Multi Purpose tray

NOTE: When loading cover paper in a cassette or Multi Purpose tray,
load the face, on which printing is supposed to be done, upward.
Use the procedure below to specify the actions performed for special paper
types.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original/Paper Setup and then
[Change] of Special Paper Action.

Select [Adjust Print
Direction] or [Speed
Priority].

Common Settings - Special Paper Action
Select the default action for printing on
special paper.
Please refer to the manual for details.

Adjust Print
Direction

Speed Priority

Cancel
Status

6-16

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

System Menu

Switching Unit of Measurement
Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions.
Use the procedure below to change the input units.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Common Settings] and then [Change] of Measurement.

Select [mm] for
metric or [inch] for
inch.

Common Settings - Measurement
Select the units of measurement for length.

English
mm

inch

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

Error Handling
Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has occurred. The
possible errors and what to do for the errors are as follows.
Duplexing Paper Error
Select what to do when duplex printing is not possible for the selected
paper size and media type.
Item

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Description

1-sided

Printed in 1-sided

Display Error

Error message to cancel printing is
displayed.

6-17

System Menu
Finishing Paper Error
When finishing (stapling, punching, offsetting or auto image rotating) is not
available for the selected paper size or media type, use this setting to
specify whether to ignore the finishing setting and print anyway or to
display the error screen.
Processing

Description

Ignore

The setting is ignored and the job is
printed.

Display Error

Error message to cancel printing is
displayed.

No Staple Error
Select what to do when staples run out during printing.
Item

Description

Ignore

Printing continues without stapling.

Display Error

Error message to cancel printing is
displayed.

NOTE: The messages are displayed when the optional document
finisher, built-in finisher or optional 3000 sheet document finisher is
installed.
Stapling Limit Error
Select what to do when stapling capacity is exceeded during printing.
Item

Description

Ignore

Printing continues without stapling.

Display Error

Error message to cancel printing is
displayed

NOTE: The messages are displayed when the optional document
finisher, built-in finisher or optional 3000 sheet document finisher is
installed.

6-18

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

System Menu
Punch Waste Full Error
Select what to do when the punch waste box becomes full during printing.
Processing

Description

Ignore

Printing continues without punching.

Display Error

Error message to cancel printing is
displayed.

NOTE: The messages are displayed when the optional 3000 sheet
document finisher and punch unit are installed.
Use the procedure below to specify the settings for error handling.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Common Settings] and then [Next] of Error Handling.

Press [Change] at
the error you wish to
change the
handling.

Common Settings - Error Handling
Duplexing Paper Error:
Display Error

Change

Finishing Paper Error:
Not Stapling

Change

No Staple Error:
Not Stapling

Change

Stapling Limit Error:
Not Stapling

Change

Punch Waste Full Error:
Not Punching

Change

Return to Top
End

End
10/5/200 6

10:10

Select the error handling method in the selection screen for each of the
errors and then press [OK].

The previous screen appears. To set the handling for a different error,
repeat steps 3 and 4.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

6-19

System Menu

Output Tray
Select output tray respectively for copy jobs, print jobs from Custom Box,
computers, and FAX RX data. The options are as follows.
Output Tray

Descriptions

Top Tray

Delivery on Top Tray of the machine.

Finisher Tray

Delivery on Tray set to the optional
document finisher or built-in finisher.

Tray A, Tray B*, Tray C*

Delivery on Tray A-C of the optional 3000
sheet document finisher.

Job Separator

Delivery on the optional job separator.

Tray 1-7 *

Delivery on Tray 1-7 (1: uppermost) of the
optional Mailbox.

Select [Face Up] (print surface up) or [Face Down] (print surface
down) for paper orientation at output.

NOTE: Optional job separator, document finisher, 3000 sheet document
finisher, and Mailbox are required.
FAX RX data output can be specified when the optional fax kit is installed.
Use the procedure below to select the output tray.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Common Settings] and then [Next] of Output Tray.

Press [Change] of Copy/Custom Box, Printer, or FAX Port 1 or FAX Port 2.

NOTE: FAX Port 1 appears when the optional fax kit is installed. If you
have 2 optional fax kits installed, Fax Port 2 appears. You can specify the
output tray for the second kit (Dual FAX).

6-20

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

System Menu

Select Output Tray.
For [Finisher Tray],
[Tray B], [Tray C] or
[Tray 1-7], select
[Face Up] (print
surface up) or [Face
Down] (print surface
down) for paper
orientation at output.

Common Settings - Copy/Custom Box
Select output tray for copy jobs.

Top Tray

Tray A

Tray B

Tray C

Job Separator
Tray

Tray 1

Tray 2

Tray 3

Face Up

Tray 4

Tray 5

Tray 6

Tray 7

Face Down

Output Face

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

Function Defaults
Defaults are the values automatically set after the warm-up is completed
or the Reset key is pressed.
Set the defaults for available settings such as copying and sending. Setting
the frequently-used values as defaults makes subsequent jobs easier.
Original Orientation
Set the original orientation defaults. The available default settings are
shown below.
Item

Description

Top Edge Top

Select the original's top edge at the top.

Top Edge Left

Select the original's top edge at the left.

Refer to page 1-10 for Original Orientation.
Use the procedure below to select the default orientation when originals
are placed on the platen.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change]
of Original Orientation.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

6-21

System Menu

Select [Top Edge
Top] or [Top Edge
Left] for the default.

Common Settings - Original Orientation
Select the default original orientation.

Top Edge Top

Top Edge Left

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

Continuous Scan
Set the continuous scan defaults. The available default settings are shown
below.
Item

Description

Off

Continuous scan not performed

Continuous scan performed

Refer to page 1-10 for Original Orientation.
Use the procedure below to select the default settings for continuous
scanning.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change]
of Continuous Scan.

Select [Off] or [On]
for the default.

Common Settings - Continuous Scan
Select the default Continuous Scan setting.

Off

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Use the procedure below to select the default quality setting for originals.

6-22

Press [OK].

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

System Menu
Original Image
Set the default original document type. The available default settings are
shown below.
Item

Description

Text+Photo

Text and photos together.

Text

Only text, no photos.

Photo

Only photos, no text.

Use the procedure below to select the default quality setting for originals.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change]
of Original Image.

Select the default for
[Text+Photo], [Text]
or [Photo].

Common Settings - Original Image
Set the default original document type.

Text+Photo

Text

Photo

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

Scan Resolution
Select the default scanning resolution. The options are 600×600 dpi,
400×400 dpi Ultra Fine, 300×300 dpi, 200×400 dpi Super Fine, 200×200
dpi Fine, 200×100 dpi Normal.
Use the procedure below to select the default resolution setting.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change]
of Scan Resolution.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

6-23

System Menu

Select the default
resolution.

Common Settings - Scan Resolution
Select default scan resolution.

600x600dpi

400x400dpi
Ultra Fine

300x300dpi

200x400dpi
Super Fine

200x200dpi
Fine

200x100dpi
Normal

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

Color Selection
Select the default scanning color setting. The available default settings are
shown below.
Color mode

Description

Full Color

Scan document in full color.

Grayscale

Scan document in grayscale for smoother
and finer finish.

Monochrome

Scan document in black and white. File
size is smaller than Full Color or Grayscale.

Use the procedure below to select the default color setting.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change]
of Color Selection.

Select the default
color setting.

Common Settings - Color Selection
Select default color.

Full Color

Grayscale

Monochrome

Cancel
Status

6-24

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

System Menu
File Format
Select the default file type to send the scanned originals. The available
default settings are shown below.
File Format

Description

TIFF

Send files in TIFF format.

PDF

Send files in PDF format.

JPEG

Send files in JPEG format.

High Comp. PDF*

Send files in High Comp. PDF format (refer
to page 2-16).

Only displayed when the optional PDF upgrade kit has been used.

NOTE: Refer to page 2-14 for file formats.
Use the procedure below to select the default file format.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change]
of File Format.

Select the default file
format.

Common Settings - File Format
Set default file type.

TIFF

PDF

JPEG

High Comp.
PDF

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

File Separation
Select the default file separation setting. The available default settings are
shown below.
File Format
Off

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Description
No file separation performed (all the pages
are compiled in one file).

6-25

System Menu

File Format

Description

Each Page

Each scanned page is created into a
separate file.

NOTE: Refer to page 2-19 for file separation.
Use the procedure below to select the default file separation setting.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change]
of File Separation.

Select the default for
[Off] or [Each Page].

Common Settings - File Separation
Select the default file separation setting.

Each Page

Off

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

Density
Set the default density. The available default settings are shown below.

NOTE: You cannot specify the density if you have selected [Full Color] in
Color Selection.

Item

Description

Manual (Normal 0)

Set to 0 (Normal) in the Manual density.

Auto

Set to Auto density.

Use the procedure below to select the default zoom setting.

6-26

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change]
of Density.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

System Menu

Select the default
density.

Common Settings - Density
Select the default Density.

Manual
(Normal 0)

Auto

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

Zoom
Select the enlarged/reduced default when paper size/sending size
changed after the originals set. The available default settings are shown
below.
Item

Description

100%

Copy (send/save) at actual size (100%).

Auto

Automatically reduce or enlarge the
originals to match paper size/ sending size.

Use the procedure below to select the default zoom setting.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change]
of Zoom.

Select the default
zoom setting.

Common Settings - Zoom
Select the default Zoom level.

100%

Auto

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

File Name Entry
Set an automatically entered name (default) for jobs. Additional
information such as Date and Time and Job No. can also be set.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

6-27

System Menu

NOTE: Refer to page 1-54 and page 2-31 for name entry.
Use the procedure below to set the default file name.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Function Defaults, [T] and then
[Change] of File Name Entry.

Press [File Name] to
enter the file name in
not more than 30
characters.

Common Settings - File Name Entry
Set the default file name.

File Name

doc

Additional Info.

[ Date and Time

Job No.

]

Date and Time

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

NOTE: Refer to the Operation Guide for entering characters.

Press [OK].

Press [Date and Time] to add the date/time to the job, or press [Job No.] to
add the job number to the job. The added information will be displayed in
Additional Info..

Press [OK].

E-mail Subject/Body
Set the subject and body automatically entered (default subject and body)
when sending the scanned originals by E-mail.

NOTE: Refer to the Operation Guide for sending E-mail.
Use the procedure below to set the default e-mail subject and message
body.

6-28

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Function Defaults, [T], and then
[Change] of E-mail Subject/Body.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

System Menu

Press [Subject] to
enter an E-mail
subject not more
than 60 characters.

Common Settings - E-mail Subject/Body
Set the default subject and body.
Subject
Body

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

NOTE: Refer to the Operation Guide for entering characters.

Press [OK].

Press [Body] to enter an E-mail Body not more than 500 characters.

Press [OK].

Check that the entries are correct and press [OK].

Border Erase Default
Set the default width to be erased as a border. The table below shows the
measurement ranges that can be set.
Input units

Range

Inch models

0 to 2" (in 0.01" increments)

Metric models

0 mm to 50 mm (in 1 mm increments)

NOTE: Refer to page 1-27 and page 2-28 for Border Erase.
Use the procedure below to set the default border erase width.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Function Defaults, [T] and then
[Change] of Border Erase Default.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

6-29

System Menu

Press [+] or [–] for
the Border and
Gutter width to
erase.

Common Settings - Border Erase Default
Select the default border erase width.
Use [-]/[+] or the numeric keys to enter a number.

Gutter(0.00 - 2.00)

Border(0.00 - 2.00)

0.23

You can use the
number keypad to
enter the number
directly.

0.47

# Keys

Cancel
Status

Paper is remaining in Document Processor.

10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

Margin Default
Set the default margin. The table below shows the measurement ranges
that can be set.
Input units

Range

Inch models

-0.75 to 0.75" (in 0.01" increments)

Metric models

-18 mm to 18 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Use the procedure below to set the default margin width.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Function Defaults, [T] and then
[Change] of Margin Default.

Use the [+] or [-] key
to enter the margin
widths for Left/Right
and Top/Bottom.

Common Settings - Margin Default
Select the default margin width.
Use [-]/[+] or the numeric keys to enter a number.

L/R(-0.75 - +0.75)

0.23

You can use the
number keypad to
enter the number
directly.

T/B(-0.75 - +0.75)
"

0.47

# Keys

Cancel
Status

6-30

Paper is remaining in Document Processor.

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

System Menu
Collate/Offset
Set the defaults for Collate/Offset. The table below shows the available
settings.
Item
Collate

Offset

Description

Off

Collate not performed.

Collate performed.

Off

Offset not performed.

Each Set
(Each Page)

Offset performed. (If [Off]) is selected of
Collate, it is performed [Each Page].)

NOTE: Refer to page 1-12 for Collate/Offset.
Use the procedure below to set the default Collate/Offset settings.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Function Defaults, [T] and then
[Change] of Collate/Offset.

Select the defaults
for Collate and
Offset respectively.

Common Settings - Collate/Offset
Select the default collate/offset setting.

Collate

Off

Offset

Off

Each Set

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

Auto Image Rotation
Select the default Auto Image Rotation setting. The table below shows the
available settings.
Item

Description

Off

No Auto Image Rotation performed.

Auto Image Rotation performed.

NOTE: Refer to page 1-49 for Auto Image Rotation.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

6-31

System Menu
Use the procedure below to set the default Auto Image Rotation settings.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Function Defaults, [T] and then
[Change] of Auto Image Rotation.

Select the default for
[Off] or [On].

Common Settings - Auto Image Rotation
Select the default Auto Image Rotation setting.

Off

Cancel

Status

10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

Form Overlay (Copy)
Select the default form and form density from Form Box for form overlay
for copy jobs.

NOTE: Refer to page 1-38 for Form Overlay (Copy).
The table below shows the available settings.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Function Defaults, [T] and then
[Change] of Form Overlay (Copy).

Press [Select Stored Form].

Press [+] or [–] to
enter the form
density.

Common Settings - Form Overlay(Copy)
Set the default form overlay for copies.

Off
Select
Stored Form

Density(10 - 100)

100

None
Select Form

Cancel
Status

6-32

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [Select Form].

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

System Menu

Select the form that
you want to use and
press [OK].

Common Settings - Select Form
Select a form.

Form for Form Overlay(Copy)
Name

Date and Time

Size

Document1

05/05/2006 09:10

1.1MB

Document2

05/05/2006 09:20

1.2MB

Document3

05/05/2006 09:30

2.1MB

Document4

05/05/2006 09:40

2.2MB

Document5

05/05/2006 09:50

1.2MB

001/999

Detail

Cancel

NOTE: Press [Detail] to check File Name, Storing Size (Document size),
Data Size, and Date Stored for the Form.

Press [OK].

Form Overlay (Box)
Select the default form and form density from Custom Box for form overlay
for box print jobs.

NOTE: Refer to page 4-29 for Form Overlay (Box).
The table below shows the available settings.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Function Defaults, [T] and [Change]
at Form Overlay (Box).

Press [Select Stored Form].

Press [+] or [–] to
enter the form
density.

Common Settings - Form Overlay(Box)
Set the default form overlay for box print jobs.

Off

Density(10 - 100)

100

Select
Stored Form

None
Select Form

Cancel
Status

Press [Select Form].

Select the Box where the Form is stored and press [Open].

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

6-33

System Menu

NOTE: Press [Detail] to check Box No., Box Name, Usage Restriction,
Owner, Permission and Auto File Deletion.

Select the Form that
you want to use and
press [OK].

Common Settings - Select Form
Select a form.

BOX1
No.

Name

Owner

Use(%)

001

BOX101

anonymous

10%

002

BOX102

anonymous

10%

003

BOX103

anonymous

004

BOX104

anonymous

005

BOX105

anonymous

Detail
001/200

Preview

Cancel

Open

NOTE: Press [Detail] to check File Name, Storing Size (Document size),
Data Size, Pages, Scan Resolution, Color/Monochrome, Data Size, and
Date Stored in the Form.

Press [OK].

EcoPrint
Select the EcoPrint default. The table below shows the available settings.
Item

Description

Off

No EcoPrint performed.

EcoPrint performed.

NOTE: Refer to page 1-46 for EcoPrint.
Use the procedure below to set the default EcoPrint setting.

6-34

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Function Defaults, [T] and then
[Change] of EcoPrint.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

System Menu

Select [Off] or [On]
for the default.

Common Settings - EcoPrint
Select the default EcoPrint setting.

Off

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

PDF/TIFF/JPEG Image
Select the default PDF/TIFF/JPEG file quality. Five options are available
from 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to 5 High Quality (Low Comp.).

NOTE: Higher quality will make the stored files larger.
Refer to page 2-14 for file formats.
Use the procedure below to select the default file quality setting.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Common Settings] and [Next] of Function Defaults. Press [T] twice
and then [Change] of PDF/TIFF/JPEG Image.

Select the default
image quality from [1
Low Quality (High
Comp.)] to [5 High
Quality (Low
Comp.)].

Common Settings - PDF/TIFF/JPEG Image
Set the default PDF/TIFF/JPEG
quality level.
Higher quality will make the stored files larger.

Low Quality

High Quality

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

High Comp. PDF Image
Select the default High Comp.
This setting is only displayed when the optional PDF upgrade kit has been
used.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

6-35

System Menu
The table below shows the available settings.
Item

Description

Compression Ratio
Priority

Compression Ratio is given priority with
smaller file size.

Standard

Standard quality

Quality Priority

Image quality is given priority with larger file
size.

Use the procedure below to select the default quality setting for highly
compressed PDF files.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Common Settings] and [Next] of Function Defaults. Press [T] twice
and [Change] of High Comp. PDF Image.

Select the default for
[Compression Ratio
Priority], [Standard],
or [Quality Priority].

Common Settings - High Comp. PDF Image
Set the default compressed PDF quality level.
Higher quality will make the stored files larger.

Compression
Ratio Priority

Standard

Quality
Priority

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

Repeat Copying
Select the Repeat Copy default. The options are as follows. The table
below shows the available settings.
Item

Description

Off

No Repeat Copy is performed.

Repeat Copy is performed.

NOTE: This setting is not displayed when the optional Security Kit is
installed or the Repeat Copy job is set to 0.
Refer to page 1-57 for Repeat Copy.
Use the procedure below to set the default Repeat Copy setting.

6-36

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

System Menu

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Common Settings] and [Next] of Function Defaults. Press [T] twice
and [Change] of Repeat Copy.

Select the default for
[Off] or [On].

Common Settings - Repeat Copy
Select the default repeat copy settings.

Off

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

Orientation Confirmation
Select whether to display a screen for selecting the orientation of the
originals to be placed on the platen when using the following functions.
(For more information, refer to page 1-10 for Original Orientation.)
•

Duplex

•

Margin/Centering originals

•

Border erase

•

Combine mode

•

Memo mode

•

Page numbering

•

Booklets

•

Stapling (optional feature)

If [On] is selected as the Orientation Confirmation setting in the
System Menu, the selection screen for original orientation appears
when you select any of the above functions.

Orientation Confirmation Setting
Use the procedure below to select the default Orientation Confirmation
setting.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Common Settings] and [Change] of Orientation Confirmation.

Select the default for [Off] or [On].

Press [OK].

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

6-37

System Menu

Copy Settings
The following settings are available for copying functions.
•

Border Erase for Back Page …6-38

•

Paper Selection …6-39

•

Auto Paper Selection …6-40

•

Auto % Priority …6-40

•

Preset Limit …6-41

•

Quick Setup Registration …6-41

•

Reserve Next Priority …6-43

NOTE: If user login is enabled, you can only change the settings by
logging in with administrator privileges.

Border Erase for Back Page
Select the Border Erase Method for Back Page of a sheet. The table below
shows the available settings.
Item

Description

Same as Front Page

Border Erase performed in the same
setting as the front page

Do Not Erase

No Border Erase performed on the back
page

NOTE: Refer to page 1-27 and page 2-28 for Border Erase.
Use the procedure below to specify the border erase setting for the back
of the page.

6-38

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Copy] and [Change] of Border Erase to Back Page.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

System Menu

Press [Same as
Front Page] or [Do
not Erase].

Copy - Border Erase to Back Page
Select the border erase method
for back of page.

Same as
Front Page

Do Not Erase

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

Paper Selection
Set the default paper selection. The table below shows the available
settings.
Item

Description

Auto

Automatically select the cassette
containing paper in the same size as
originals.

Default Paper Source

Select paper source set by Default Paper
Source (refer to page 6-13).

Use the procedure below to set the default paper selection.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Copy] and [Change] of Paper Selection.

Press [Auto] or
[Default Paper
Source].

Copy - Paper Selection
Set the default paper selection.

Auto

Default Paper
Source

Cancel
Status

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

6-39

System Menu

Auto Paper Selection
If [Auto] is selected for Paper Selection, set the paper size selection
method when the zoom changes. The table below shows the available
settings.
Item

Description

Most Suitable Size

Select paper based on the current zoom
and the size of the original.

Same as Original Size

Select paper that matches the size of the
original, regardless the zoom.

Use the procedure below to specify the action performed for Auto Paper
Selection.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Copy] and [Change] of Auto Paper Selection.

Press [Most Suitable
Size] or [Same as
Original Size].

Copy - Auto Paper Selection
Set the automatic paper selection method.
[Most Suitable Size]: Selects paper based on
the current zoom and the size of the original.
[Same as Original Size]: Selects paper
that matches the size of the original.

Most Suitable
Size

Same as
Original Size

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

Auto % Priority
When a paper source of different size from the original is selected, select
whether automatic zoom (reduce/zoom) is performed. The table below
shows the available settings.
Item

Description

Off

No zoom performed (copied in original
size).

Automatic zoom performed as appropriate.

Use the procedure below to specify the automatic zoom priority.

6-40

Press the System Menu key.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

System Menu

Press [Copy] and [Change] of Auto % Priority.

Select the default for
[Off] or [On].

Copy - Auto % Priority
When a specific paper source is selected,
adjust the zoom level as appropriate.

Off

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

Preset Limit
Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time. Options are
1-999 copies.
Use the procedure below to set the limit on the number of copies.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Copy] and [Change] of Preset Limit.

Press [+] or [–] or
use the numeric
keys to enter the
limit for the number
of copies.

Copy - Preset Limit
Restrict the number of copies that can be made.
Use [-]/[+] or the numeric keys to enter a number.

(1 - 999)

copy(s)

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

Quick Setup Registration
Select the copying functions to be registered for Quick Setup. Six keys of
the Quick Setup screen are allocated to typical functions but can be
changed as necessary. Six items from the following options are available.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

•

Paper Selection

•

Zoom

•

Staple/Punch

6-41

System Menu
•

Density

•

Duplex

•

Combine

•

Collate/Offset

•

Original Image

•

Original Size

NOTE: Refer to the Operation Guide for the Quick Setup steps.
Use the procedure below to register the Quick Setup functions.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Copy] and [Next] of Quick Setup Registration.

Press [Change] of
the function to be
registered in Quick
Setup.

Copy - Quick Setup Registration
Paper Selection:
Key 1

Change

Zoom:
Key 2

Change

Staple/Punch:
Key 3

Change

Density:
Key 4

Change

Duplex:
Key 5

Change

Combine:
Key 6

Change

Collate/Offset:
Off

Change

Original Image:
Off

Change

Original Size:
Off

Change

Return to Top
Status

Select a key (1-6)
allocated on the
Quick Setup
Registration screen.
Press [Off] to delete
a key from the Quick
Setup.

Off
Key 1

Key 2

Key 3

Key 4

Key 5

Key 6

Cancel

6-42

10:10

Copy - Paper Selection

OK
10/5/2006

Status

Close
10/5/200 6

10:10

Press [OK]. A confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes].

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

System Menu

Reserve Next Priority
Select the operation of the reserve copy and interrupt copy functions and
for canceling jobs.
Use the procedure below to select the default Reserve Next Priority
setting.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Copy] and [Change] of Reserve Next Priority.

Select the default for
[Off] or [On].

Common Settings - Auto Image Rotation
Select the default Auto Image Rotation setting.

Off

Cancel
Status

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

OK
10/10/2007

10:10

Press [OK].

6-43

System Menu

Sending Settings
The sending settings allow you to specify the following sending function
options.
•

Quick Setup Registration

•

High Comp. PDF Auto Color

NOTE: If user login is enabled, you can only change the settings by
logging in with administrator privileges.

Quick Setup Registration
Select the sending functions to be registered for Quick Setup. Six keys of
the Quick Setup screen are allocated to typical functions but can be
changed as necessary.
Six items in the following options are available.
•

Original Size

•

2-sided/Book Original

•

Sending Size

•

Original Orientation

•

File Format

•

Density

•

Original Image

•

Scan Resolution

•

Color Selection

•

Zoom

Use the procedure below to register the Quick Setup functions.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Send Setting] and [Next] of Quick Setup Registration.

Press [Change] of
the function to be
registered in Quick
Setup.

Send Setting - Quick Setup Registration
Original Size:
Key 1

Change

2-sided/Book Original:
Key 2

Change

Sending Size:
Key 3

Change

Original Orientation:
Key 4

Change

File Format:
Key 5

Change

Density:
Key 6

Change

Original Image:

Change

Scan Resolution:
Off

Change

Zoom:
Off

Change

Off
Color Selection:
Off

Return to Top
Status

6-44

Close
10/ 5/2006

10:10

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

System Menu

Select a key (1-6)
allocated on the
Quick Setup
Registration screen.
Press [Off] to delete
a key from the Quick
Setup.

Send Setting - Original Size
Register Original Size function on the Quick Setup screen.

Off
Key 1

Key 2

Key 3

Key 4

Key 5

Key 6

Cancel

OK
10/5/2006

Status

10:10

Press [OK]. A confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes].

High-compression PDF Auto Color
When documents are sent as highly compressed PDF files, compression
of monochrome documents may have the opposite effect of making the
files larger. You can prevent monochrome documents increasing in size by
specifying that the software automatically detect color and monochrome.
Use the procedure below to specify the High-compression PDF Auto Color
setting.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Send Setting] and then [Change] of High Comp. PDF Auto Color.

Press [On].

Send Setting - High Comp. PDF Auto Color
When sending documents in the format
of High Comp. PDF, detect whether the documents
are in color or monochrome automatically.

English
Off

Cancel
Status

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

6-45

System Menu

Document Box/Removable Memory Settings
The following settings are available for Document Box and removable USB
memory.
•

Registering / Editing Box …6-46

•

Job Box …6-46

•

Quick Setup Registration …6-46

Registering / Editing Box
Creates a new box, edits a box, or checks details of a box in the custom
box, or deletes a box from the custom box. For details, refer to Using
Custom Box on page 4-5.

Job Box
The following two operations can be done. For details, refer to each page
shown below.
•

Setting the Number of Stored Jobs (page 4-24)

•

Setting the Number of Stored Jobs (page 4-28)

Quick Setup Registration
Select the Storing in Box, Sending from Box, Printing from Box functions
to be registered for Quick Setup. Six keys of the Quick Setup screen are
allocated to typical functions but can be changed as necessary.
The options are as follows.
Store File Quick Setup
•

Color

•

Storing Size

•

Density

•

2-sided/Book Original

•

Scan Resolution

•

Zoom

•

Original Orientation

•

Original Size

•

Original Image

Printing from Box Quick Setup

6-46

•

Paper Selection

•

Collate/Offset

•

Staple/Punch

•

Duplex

•

Delete After Printed

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

System Menu
Sending from Box Quick Setup
•

File Format

•

Delete after Transmitted

Use the procedure below to register the Quick Setup functions.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Document Box/Removable Memory] and [Next] of Quick Setup
Registration.

Press [Next] of Store File, Send, or Print.

Press [Change] of
the function to be
registered in Quick
Setup.

Document Box/Removable Memory - Store File
Color:
Key 1

Change

Storing Size:
Key 2

Change

Density:
Key 3

Change

2-sided/Book Original:
Key 4

Change

Resolution:
Key 5

Change

Zoom:
Key 6

Change

Original Orientation:
Off

Change

Original Size:
Off

Change

Original Image:
Off

Change

Return to Top
Status

Select a key (1-6)
allocated on the
Quick Setup screen.
Press [Off] to delete
a key from the Quick
Setup.

Off
Key 1

Key 2

Key 3

Key 4

Key 5

Key 6

Cancel

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

10:10

Document Box/Removable Memory - Color

Status

Close
10/ 5/2006

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK]. A confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes].

6-47

System Menu

Printer Settings
Printing from computers, settings are generally made on the application
software screen. However, the following settings are available for
configuring the defaults to customize the machine.
•

Printer Emulation …6-48

•

Resolution …6-48

•

EcoPrint …6-49

•

KIR …6-49

•

Override A4/Letter …6-50

•

Duplex …6-51

•

Copies …6-51

•

Orientation …6-52

•

Wide A4 …6-53

•

Form Feed Timeout …6-53

•

LF Action …6-54

•

CR Action …6-54

Printer Emulation
Set emulation options to run the machine by the commands for other
printers. Refer to Emulation on page 3-4 for the setting method.

Resolution
You can set the resolution used for printing.
Select default resolution from Fast1200, 600 dpi, or 300 dpi.

NOTE: Fast1200 is our original resolution mode, in which photo and
other graphic halftone can be reproduced much better than 600 dpi.
Use the procedure below to set the resolution.

6-48

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Printer] and [Change] of Resolution.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

System Menu

Press [300dpi],
[600dpi], or
[Fast1200].

Printer - Resolution
Select default resolution.

300dpi

Fast1200

600dpi

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

EcoPrint
EcoPrint conserves toner when printing. This is recommended for test
copies where faded printing is not a problem.
Use the procedure below to specify the EcoPrint setting.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Printer] and [Change] of EcoPrint.

Press [Off] or [On].

Printer - EcoPrint
Select the default EcoPrint setting.

Off

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

KIR
The machine is equipped with the smoothing KIR (Kyocera Image
Refinement) function, which realizes an excellent output resolution of
about 2400 dpi × 600 dpi.
Use the procedure below to select the smoothing (KIR) setting.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Printer] and [Change] of KIR.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

6-49

System Menu

Press [On] or [Off].

Printer - KIR
Select the default KIR (smoothing) setting.

Off

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

Override A4/Letter
Select whether to treat A4 size and Letter, which are similar in size, as the
same size when printing. The table below shows the available settings.
Item

Description

A4 and Letter are regarded as the same in
size.

Off

A4 and Letter are not regarded as the
same in size.

Use the procedure below to select the interface.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Printer] and [Change] of Override A4/Letter.

Press [Off] or [On].

Printer - Override A4/Letter
Treat A4 and Letter as the same size when printing.

Off

Cancel
Status

6-50

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

System Menu

Duplex
Select binding orientation for duplex mode. The table below shows the
available settings.
Item

Description

Finish

2-sided Bind
ShortEdge

Shorter edge
bound

2-sided Bind
LongEdge

Longer edge
bound

1-sided

No duplex mode

Use the procedure below to select the interface.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Printer] and [Change] of Duplex.

Press [1-sided], [2sided Bind
LongEdge], or [2sided Bind
ShortEdge].

Printer - Duplex
Set the default duplex mode.

1-sided

2-sided
Bind LongEdge

2-sided
Bind ShortEdge

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

Copies
Set the default number of copies, from 1 to 999.
Use the procedure below to select the interface.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Printer] and [Change] of Copies.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

6-51

System Menu

Press [+], [–] or the
numeric keys to set
the default number
of copies.

Printer - Copies
Set the default number of copies.
Use [-]/[+] or the numeric keys to enter a number.

(1 - 999)

copy(s)

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

Orientation
Set the default orientation, Portrait or Landscape.

Portrait

Landscape

Printer

Use the procedure below to set the default orientation for printing.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Printer] and [Change] of Orientation.

Press [Portrait] or
[Landscape].

Printer - Orientation
Select the default printer orientation.

Portrait

Landscape

Cancel
Status

6-52

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

System Menu

Wide A4
Increase the number of characters per line for A4 paper.
Use the procedure below to specify the Wide A4 setting.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Printer] and [Change] of Wide A4.

Press [Off] or [On].

Printer - Wide A4
Enlarge the print area for A4 paper.

Off

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

Form Feed Timeout
Receiving print data from the computer, the machine may sometimes wait
if there is no information signalling that the last page does not have any
more data to be printed. When the preset timeout passes, the machine
automatically prints paper. The options are between 5 and 495 seconds.
Use the procedure below to set the form feed timeout.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Printer], [T] and [Change] of Form Feed Timeout.

Press [+] or [–] to set
the Form Feed
Timeout.

Printer - Form Feed Timeout
Set the amount of time to wait from the last transmission
before automatic form feed is initiated.

(5 - 495)

You can set the
timeout delay in
seconds.

You cannot use the
number keypad to
enter this value.

Cancel
Status

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

sec.

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

6-53

System Menu

LF Action
Set the line feed action when the machine receives the line feed code
(character code 0AH). The table below shows the available settings.
Item

Description

LF Only

Only line feed performed.

LF and CR

Line feed and character return performed.

Ignore LF

No line feed performed.

Use the procedure below to select the interface.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Printer], [T] and [Change] of LF Action.

Press [LF Only], [LF
and CR] or [Ignore
LF].

Printer - LF Action
Set the line feed action.

LF Only

LF and CR

Ignore LF

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

CR Action
Set the character return action when the machine receives the character
return code (character code 0DH). The table below shows the available
settings.
Item

Description

CR Only

Only character return performed.

LF and CR

Character return and line feed performed.

Ignore CR

No character return performed.

Use the procedure below to select the interface.

6-54

Press the System Menu key.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

System Menu

Press [Printer], [T] and [Change] of CR Action.

Press [CR Only], [LF
and CR] or [Ignore
CR].

Printer - CR Action
Set the character return action.

CR Only

LF and CR

Ignore CR

Cancel
Status

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

6-55

System Menu

Network Setup
The machine is equipped with network interface, which is compatible with
network protocols such as TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, and AppleTalk. It
enables network printing on the Windows, Macintosh, UNIX, NetWare and
other platforms.

TCP/IP Setup (by Entering IP Addresses)
Set up TCP/IP to connect to the Windows network. Set the IP addresses,
subnet masks, and gateway addresses.

NOTE: Prior to the IP address entries, obtain permission from the
network administrator.
Use the procedure below to specify the TCP/IP settings.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Change] of TCP/IP.

Press [On] on the
left side of the touch
panel.

System - TCP/IP
Use TCP/IP.

DHCP

Off

IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default
Gateway

0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0

Cancel
Status

Press [Off] of DHCP.

Press [IP Address]
and enter the
address using the
numeric keys.

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

System - TCP/IP
Use TCP/IP.

Off

DHCP
On

On
Off

IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default
Gateway

192.168.1.150
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0

Cancel
Status

6-56

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [Subnet Mask] and enter the address using the numeric keys.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

System Menu

Press [Default Gateway] and enter the address using the numeric keys.

Check if all the address entries are correct and press [OK].

Press the Power key and confirm that the Power key/indicator and the
memory indicator are off. After that, turn the main power switch off and on.

TCP/IP Setup (Equipped with DHCP Server)
Set up TCP/IP when the network is equipped with the DHCP server. The
machine works as the DHCP client. Use the procedure below to select the
interface.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Change] of TCP/IP.

Press [On] on the
left side of the touch
panel.

System - TCP/IP
Use TCP/IP.

Off

DHCP
On

Off

IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default
Gateway

0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [On] of DHCP.

Press [OK].

Press the Power key and confirm that the Power key/indicator and the
memory indicator are off. After that, turn the main power switch off and on.

NetWare Setup
Select the NetWare network connection. After that, select frame types for
NetWare network from Auto, Ethernet-II, 802.3, 802.2, or SNAP.
Use the procedure below to select the interface.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Change] of NetWare.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

6-57

System Menu

Press [On].

System - NetWare
Use NetWare.

Frame Type

Off

Ether-II

Auto
On

802.2

802.3
IP
Address
SNAP

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press the key for the frame type you want to use.

Press [OK].

Press the Power key and confirm that the Power key/indicator and the
memory indicator are off. After that, turn the main power switch off and on.

AppleTalk Setup
Select the Apple Talk network connection.
Use the procedure below to select the interface.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Change] of AppleTalk.

Press [On].

System - AppleTalk
Use AppleTalk.
*Please set TCP/IP to [On].

Off

Cancel
Status

6-58

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

Press the Power key and confirm that the Power key/indicator and the
memory indicator are off. After that, turn the main power switch off and on.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

System Menu

Printing Reports/Sending Notice
Print reports to check the machine settings and status. Default settings for
printing the result reports can also be configured.

Printing Reports
Printable reports are as follows.
Status Page
Check the information including current settings, available memory space,
and optional equipment installed.

Status Page
KM-5050
Firmware Version

Font List
Check the font samples installed in the machine.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

6-59

System Menu
Network Status Page
Check the information including network interface firmware version,
network address and protocol.

Network Status Page
KM-5050
Firmware Version

6-60

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

System Menu
Service Status Page
More detailed information is available than on the Status Page. Service
personnel usually print the service status pages for maintenance purpose.
Use the procedure below to print a report.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Report] and [Next] of Report Print.

Press [Print] for the
report you want to
print. Printing starts.

Report - Report Print
Status Page:

Font List:

Network Status:

Service Status:

A confirmation
screen appears.
Press [Yes].

Return to Top
Status

Close
10/5/2006

10:10

Send Result Report
Automatically print a report of transmission result when a transmission is
complete. The table below shows the available settings.
Item

Description

Off

No result report printed.

Result report automatically printed.
Transmitted images can also be attached.

Error Only

Result report printed only when a
transmission ends in an error. If two or
more destinations are registered, the
reports are printed only for the destinations
with the errors. Transmitted images can
also be attached.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Report], [Next] of Result Report Setting, [Next] of Send Result
Report and then [Change] of E-mail/Folder.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

6-61

System Menu

Press [Off], [On], or
[Error Only].
If you selected [On]
or [Error Only], a
screen appears for
you to specify
whether or not
transmitted images
are attached. Press
[Off] or [On] and
then press [OK].

6-62

Report - E-mail/Folder
Print a report of E-mail/Folder transmission
results.

Off

Error Only

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

System Menu

Adjustment/Maintenance
Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance.
•

Copy Density Adjustment …6-63

•

Print Density …6-64

•

Send/Box Density Adjust …6-64

•

Drum Refresh …6-65

•

Correcting Fine Black Lines …6-66

•

Charger Auto Cleaning …6-67

•

Display Brightness …6-67

•

Silent Mode …6-68

•

Auto Color Correction...6-68

•

System Initialization …6-69

NOTE: If user login is enabled, you can only change the settings by
logging in with administrator privileges.

Copy Density Adjustment
Adjust copy density. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels both in auto and
manual density modes.
Use the procedure below to adjust the copy density.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [T], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and [Next] of Copy Density
Adjustment.

Press [Change] of Auto for auto density mode or of Manual for manual
density mode.

Press [-3] - [+3]
(Lighter-Darker) to
adjust density.

Adjustment/Maintenance - Manual
Adjust the default copy density for manual mode.

Lighter

-3

Normal

-2

-1

Darker

Cancel
Status

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

6-63

System Menu

Print Density
Adjust print density. Adjustment can be made in 5 levels.
Use the procedure below to adjust the print density.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [T], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and [Change] of Print Density.

Press [1] - [5]
(Lighter-Darker) to
adjust density.

Adjustment/Maintenance - Print Density
Adjust density for all printing jobs,
including copies.

Lighter

Darker

Cancel

Status

10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

Send/Box Density Adjust
Adjust scan density when sending or storing the data in Document Box.
Adjustment can be made in 7 levels both in auto and manual density
modes.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [T], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and [Next] of Send/Box Density
Adjust..

Press [Change] of Auto for auto density mode or of Manual for manual
density mode.

Press [-3] - [+3]
(Lighter-Darker) to
adjust density.

Adjustment/Maintenance - Auto
Adjust the default transmission/stored document density
for automatic mode.

Lighter

-3

Normal

-2

-1

Darker

Cancel
Status

6-64

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

System Menu

Drum Refresh
If printed images are blurred as if the image has flowed, or if there are blank
white areas or black dots on the image, you can reduce image blurring and
other defects by refreshing the drum.

NOTE: Drum Refresh cannot be performed while printing. Execute Drum
Refresh after the printing is done.
Use the procedure below to refresh the drum.

Place Letter or A4 on the Multi Purpose tray.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [T], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Execute] of Drum Refresh.

Press [Yes]. Drum
Refresh starts and
ends in about 6
minutes.

Adjustment/Maintenance
Drum Refresh 1:

Execute

Drum Refresh 2:

Execute

Auto Drum Refresh:

Change

Main Charger Cleaning:

Execute

Standard

Drum Refresh will be started.
Are you sure?

Yes

No
2/2

Return to Top
Status

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Close
10/5/2006

10:10

Once Drum Refresh ends, return to the Adjustment/Maintenance screen.

6-65

System Menu

Correcting Fine Black Lines
Correct fine black lines (black streaks caused by contamination), which
may appear on the copies, when the optional document processor used.
If black lines appear from the top to the bottom edge, refer to Charger Auto
Cleaning on page 6-67.

The table below shows the available settings.
Item

Description

Off

No correction performed.

On(High)

Correction performed. Select this item if
black streak remains after using On (Low).
The reproduction of the image becomes
lower when using On (Low).

On(Low)

Correction performed. The reproduction of
the image becomes lower when using Off.

NOTE: Using Correcting Fine Black Line can impair reproduction of fine
characters. It is recommended to keep the default ([Off]).
Use the procedure below to specify the setting for correcting fine black
lines.

6-66

Press the System Menu key.

Press [T], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and [Change] of Correcting Black
Line.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

System Menu

Press [Off],
[On(Low)] or
[On(High)].

Adjustment/Maintenance - Correcting Fine Black Line
Reduce the visibility of fine black lines if they
appear in a scanned image.
*Small characters will also become less visible.

On(Low)

Off

On(High)

Cancel

Status

10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

Charger Auto Cleaning
If black streaks appear on the printouts or scanned data, perform
automatic cleaning of the main chargers.
If no black line appears at the ends of the paper (margin), refer to
Correcting Fine Black Lines on page 6-66.
The procedure for using Charger Auto Cleaning is explained below.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [T], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and [Execute] of Charger Auto
Cleaning.

Press [Yes].
Automatic cleaning
of the main charger
starts and ends in
about 45 seconds.

Adjustment/Maintenance
Copy Density Adjustment:

Change

Send/Box Density Adjust.:

Print Density:

Correcting Black Line:

Execute
The charger will be cleaned.
Are you sure?

Execute

Display Brightness:

Charger Auto Cleaning:

Change
Yes

Return to Top
Status

Change

Close
10/5/200 6

10:10

Once the cleaning ends, return to the Adjustment/Maintenance screen.

Display Brightness
Set the brightness of the touch panel.
Use the procedure below to adjust the display brightness.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Press the System Menu key.

6-67

System Menu

Press [T], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and [Change] of Display Brightness.

Press [1] - [4]
(Darker- Lighter) to
adjust brightness.

Adjustment/Maintenance - Display Brightness
Set the brightness of the screen.

Darker

Lighter

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

Silent Mode
Make the machine run more quietly. Select this mode when the running
noise is uncomfortable.
Use the procedure below to set Silent mode.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [T], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and [Change] of Silent Mode.

Press [Off] or [On].

Adjustment/Maintenance - Silent Mode
Make after-printing process run more quietly.
*This may increase the time need to prepare
for the next job.

Off

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

Auto Color Correction
This setting allows you to adjust the detection level used by the machine
to determine whether the original is color or monochrome during sending.
Setting a lower value will result in more originals being identified as color,
while a larger value will tend to increase the number of originals being
identified as monochrome.

6-68

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

System Menu

NOTE: Regardless of whether the PDF upgrade kit is installed, this
option is only displayed if at least 1 GB of memory has been installed.
Use the procedure below to set the Auto Color Detection Level.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [T] > [Adjustments/Maintenance] > [Change] of Auto Color
Detection Level.

Press one of keys [1] to [5] to set the detection level.

Press [OK].

Adjustment/Maintenance - Auto Color Correction
Adjust the auto color correction.

Color

Monochrome

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

System Initialization
Initialize the hard disk mounted on the machine to return to the default
mode.
Refer to System Initialization on page 6-85 about the initialization
procedures.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

6-69

System Menu

Date/Timer
Date/Timer settings include:
•

Date/Time …6-70

•

Time Zone …6-71

•

Date Format …6-71

•

Auto Panel Reset …6-72

•

Auto Sleep …6-73

•

Auto Error Clear …6-74

NOTE: If user login is enabled, you can only change the settings by
logging in with administrator privileges.

Date/Time
Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. If you
perform Send as E-mail, the date and time set here will be displayed on the
header.

CAUTION: Be sure to set Time Zone before the Date/Time setup.
Use the procedure below to set the date and time.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [T], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Date/Time.

Press [+] or [–] to
enter the date and
time respectively.

Date/Timer - Date/Time
Set the date and time.

Summer Time
Off
On

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

NOTE: Set year (Y), month (M), date (D), hour (H), minute (M), and
second (S).

6-70

Press [Off] or [On] of Summer Time and press [OK].

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

System Menu

Time Zone
Set the time difference in the location you are from GMT.
Use the procedure below to set the time difference.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [T], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Time Zone.

Select the location
and press [OK].

Date/Timer - Time Zone
Set time zone.
Please select the location nearest you.
Time Zone

-12:00 Eniwetok
-11:00 Midway Is
-10:00 Hawaii
1/13

-09:00 Alaska
-08:00 Pfic Time
-07:00 Arizona
Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

NOTE: Press [S] or [T] to select the location.

Date Format
Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed
in Western notation.
Use the procedure below to select the date format.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [T], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Date Format.

Select [MM/DD/
YYYY], [DD/MM/
YYYY], or [YYYY/
MM/DD] and press
[OK].

Date/Timer - Date Format
Set the date and time display format.

MM/DD/YYYY

DD/MM/YYYY

YYYY/MM/DD

Cancel
Status

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

6-71

System Menu

Auto Panel Reset
If no jobs are run for a certain period of time, automatically reset settings
and return to the default setting.

NOTE: Refer to page 6-21 for the default settings.
Auto Panel Reset ON/OFF
Select to use Auto Panel Reset or not.
Use the procedure below to select the interface.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [T], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Auto Panel Reset.

Press [Off] or [On].

Date/Timer - Auto Panel Reset
Automatically reset settings and return to
default screen.

Off

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

Reset Timer
If you select [On] for Auto Panel Reset, set the amount of time to wait
before Auto Panel Reset. Options are between 5 and 495 seconds (every
five seconds).

NOTE: If you select [Off] for Auto Panel Reset, the time display does not
appear.
Use the procedure below to set the reset time.

6-72

Press the System Menu key.

Press [T], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Reset Timer.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

System Menu

Press [+] or [–] to
enter the time until
Auto Panel Reset is
turned on.

Date/Timer - Reset Timer
Set the amount of time to wait before automatic panel reset.
Use [-]/[+] to enter a number.

(5 - 495)
sec.

You cannot use the
number keypad to
enter this value.

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

Auto Sleep
If no job runs for a certain period of time, automatically enter Sleep Mode.
Refer to the Operation Guide for Sleep Mode.
Auto Sleep ON/OFF
Select whether to use Auto Sleep or not.

NOTE: Time remaining before Auto Sleep can be modified as necessary.
Refer to Sleep Timer below about the procedures.
Use the procedure below to select the interface.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [T], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Auto Sleep.

Press [Off] or [On].

Date/Timer - Auto Sleep
Automatically enter Sleep Mode.

Off

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

Sleep Timer
If you select [On] for Auto Sleep, set the amount of time to wait before Auto
Sleep. Options are between 1 and 240 minutes (every one minute).

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

6-73

System Menu

NOTE: If you select [Off] for Auto Sleep, the time display does not
appear.
Use the procedure below to set the Auto Sleep time.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [T], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Sleep Timer.

Press [+]/[–] or the
numeric keys to
enter the time until
Auto Sleep is turned
on.

Date/Timer - Sleep Timer
Set the amount of time to wait before automatic Sleep Mode.
Use [-]/[+] or the numeric keys to enter a number.

(1 - 240)
min.

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

Auto Error Clear
If an error occurs during printing, the print job stops to wait for the next step
to be taken by the user. In the Auto Error Clear mode, automatically clear
the error after a set amount of time elapses.
The following errors are automatically cleared.
Print overrun
Memory is full
Auto Error Clear ON/OFF
Select whether to use Auto Error Clear or not.
Use the procedure below to select the interface.

6-74

Press the System Menu key.

Press [T], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Auto Error Clear.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

System Menu

Press [Off] or [On].

Date/Timer - Auto Error Clear
If an error occurs, automatically clear it after
a set amount of time elapses.

Off

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

Error Clear Timer
If you select [On] for Auto Error Clear, set the amount of time to wait before
automatically clearing errors. Options are between 5 and 495 seconds
(every five seconds).
If you set 0 as the time, errors are not displayed.

NOTE: If you select [Off] for Auto Error Clear, the time display does not
appear.
Use the procedure below to set the automatic error clear delay.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [T], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Error Clear Timer.

Press [+] or [–] to
enter the time until
printing restarts.

Date/Timer - Error Clear Timer
Set the amount of time to wait before automatically clearing errors.
Use [-]/[+] to enter a number.

You cannot use the
number keypad to
enter this value.

(5 - 495)
sec.

Cancel
Status

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

6-75

System Menu

Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One-Touch Keys)
Save frequently used destinations to Address Book or One-touch Keys.
The saved destinations can be changed. The destinations are available for
Send as E-mail, Send to Folder, and Fax Transmission (optional).

Adding a Destination
Add a new destination to the Address Book. There are two registering
methods, individuals and groups. When adding a group, enter the group
name and select group members from the Address Book.

NOTE: If user login is enabled, you can only edit destinations in the
Address Book by logging in with administrator privileges.
Adding an individual
A maximum of 2,000 individual addresses can be registered. Each address
can include the information such as destination name, E-mail address,
FTP server folder path, computer folder path, and FAX No. (optional).
Use the procedure below to register a new individual contact.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Edit Destination], [Register/Edit] of Address Book, [Add], [Contact]
and then [Next].

To specify the
address number,
press [Change] in
Address Number.

Address:**
Address

Contact Name
Address Number:

Change

0033
Change

Name:
QWERTYU

Cancel

Back

Status

10:10

Press [+], [–] or numeric keys to enter a particular Address Number (12,500).
To have the number assigned automatically, enter “0000”.

6-76

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

System Menu

NOTE: Address Number is an ID for a destination. You can select any
available number out of 2,500 numbers for individuals and 500 numbers
for groups.
If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message
appears when you press [Register] and the number cannot be registered.
If you set “0000” as the address number, the address is registered under
the lowest available number.

Press [OK]. The screen shown in step 3 reappears.

Press [Change] of Name.

Enter the destination name (up to 32 characters) to be displayed on the
Address Book and press [OK]. The screen shown in step 3 reappears.

NOTE: Refer to the Operation Guide for entering characters.

Press [Address].

Press [S] or [T] to
select transmission
method from E-mail,
Folder (FTP) or
Folder (SMB).

Address:**
Contact Name

Address

E-mail
E-mail Address:

Change

abcd@wxyz.com

Change Dest.

1/5
Cancel

Back

Status

10:10

Press [Change Dest.].
The procedure differs depending on the transmission method selected in
step 11.
E-mail Address

Press [E-mail
Address] to
enter the Email address
and press [OK].

Address - E-mail Address Entry
E-mail
Address

Add a new E-mail destination.
Press [E-mail Address], then enter
the address using the keyboard screen.

The table
below explains
the items to be
entered.

Cancel
Status

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

6-77

System Menu

NOTE: Refer to the Operation Guide for entering characters.
2

Check if the entries are correct and press [OK].

The Folder (FTP) Address

Press [Host Name], [Path], [Login User Name], and [Login
Password] to enter relevant information respectively and press [OK].
Item

*
**

Max. No. of
Characters

Description

Host Name*

FTP server host name or IP
address

62 chars

Path**

Path for the file to be stored
E.g. “\User\ScanData”
If no path is entered, the file is
stored in the home directory.

126 chars

User name FTP server login

62 chars

Password for FTP server login

62 chars

If you specify a port number other than the default (21), use the
“Host name: port number” format. (E.g. FTPhostname:140)
Use single-byte alphanumeric characters to specify the path. If you
use Japanese (double-byte) characters, transmission will fail.
Address - Folder Path Entry
SMB

Host Name

FTP

Path

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

NOTE: Refer to the Operation Guide for entering characters.
2

Check if the entries are correct and press [OK].

NOTE: Press [Connection Test] to check the connection to the FTP
server you chose. If the connection fails, check the entries you made.

6-78

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

System Menu
The Folder (SMB) Address

Press [Host Name], [Path], [Login User Name], and [Login
Password] to enter relevant information respectively and press [OK].

The table below explains the items to be entered.
Item

Max. No. of
Characters

Description

Host Name*

Host name or IP address of the
sending computer

62 chars

Path**

Path to the folder used to save
files
E.g. “\User\ScanData”

126 chars

User name for folder access
For example,
abcdnet\james.smith

62 chars

Password for folder access

62 chars

If you specify a port number other than the default (139), use the

“Host name: port number” format. (E.g. SMBhostname:140)
**

Use single-byte alphanumeric characters to specify the path. If you
use Japanese (double-byte) characters, transmission will fail.
Address - Folder Path Entry
SMB

Host Name

FTP

Path

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

NOTE: Refer to the Operation Guide for entering characters.
2

Check if the entries are correct and press [OK].

NOTE: Press [Connection Test] to check the connection to the computer
you chose. If the connection fails, check the entries you made.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Check if the destination entry is correct and press [Register]. The
destination is added to the Address Book.

6-79

System Menu
Adding a Group
Compile two or more individuals into a group. Designations in the group
can be added at the same time. When adding a group, a maximum of 500
groups can be added in the Address Book.

NOTE: Before adding a group in the Address Book, the individuals to be
included in the group must be added first. Up to 100 destinations for the email, 500 destinations for the FAX, and the total of 10 destinations for the
FTP and SMB can be registered per a group.
Use the procedure below to register a group.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Edit Destination], [Register/Edit] of Address Book, [Add], [Group]
and then [Next].

To specify the
address number,
press [Change] in
Address Number.

Address:**
Group Member

Group Name

Change

Address Number:
0022

Change

Name:
ABCABC

Cancel

Back

Status

10:10

Press [+] or [–] to enter a particular Address Number (1-2,500).

NOTE: Address Number is an ID for a group. You can select any
available number out of 2,000 numbers for individuals and 500 numbers
for groups.

Press [OK]. The Group Name screen reappears.

Press [Change] of Name.

Enter the group name displayed on the Address Book not more than 32
characters.

NOTE: Refer to the Operation Guide for entering characters.

6-80

Press [Group Member].

Press [Add].

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

System Menu

Select a destination
(individual) to add to
the group.

Edit Destination - Add
Name

Sort
Dest

No.

Type

Name

Detail

CCC

0003

ABC@DEF.com

Search(Name)
Search(No.)
0001
/
0001

Detail

ABC

DEF

GHI

E-mail

JKL

MNO

PQRS TUV

Folder

WXYZ 0-9

FAX

Cancel

Status

10/5/2006

10:10

NOTE: Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or
address number. Refer to the Operation Guide for Address List.

Press [OK].

If you have more destinations to add, repeat Steps 9 to 11.
Check if the selected destination was added to the group and press
[Register]. Now the group is added to the Address Book.

Editing a Destination
Edit/delete the destinations (invididuals) you added to the Address Book.
Use the procedure below to edit a destination.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Edit Destination] and then [Register/Edit] of Address Book.

Select a destination
or group to edit.

Edit Destination
Name

Sort
No.

Type

Name

0001

ABCDE

0003

CCCCC

Detail

Search(Name)
0001
/
0001

Search(No.)
Add
Edit

ABC

DEF

Contact

GHI

JKL

MNO PQRS

TUV

WXYZ

0-9

Delete

Group

Close
Status

10/5/2006

10:10

NOTE: Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or
address number. Refer to the Operation Guide for Address List.

Press [Detail].
The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

6-81

System Menu
Editing an Individual Destination
Change Address Number, Name and destination type and address. Refer
to Adding an individual on page 6-76 for the details.
Editing a Group

Change Address Number and Name. Refer to Adding a Group on
page 6-80 for the details.

Press [Group Member].

To delete any destination from the group, select the destination and
press [Delete]. Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm the deletion.

Deleting an Individual Destination or Group
Repeat Steps 1 to 3, press [Delete]. Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm
the deletion. Deletion is performed.

Adding a Destination on One-touch Key
Add a new destination (individual or group). A maximum of 100
destinations can be registered.

NOTE: Refer to the Operation Guide for use of One-touch Key.
Use the procedure below to register a new destination under a One-touch
key.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Edit Destination] and [Register/Edit] of One-touch Key.

Select a One-touch
Key number (001 to
100) for the
destination.
Pressing [No.]
enables direct entry
of a One-touch Key
number.
Select a One-touch
Key with no
registered
destination.

6-82

Edit Destination - One-touch Key
Register a one-touch key.

001
AAA

002
BBB

003
CCC

004

005

006

007

008

009

010

011

012

013

014

015

016

017

018

019

020

No.
Register
/Edit
Delete
001/005

Detail

Close
Status

10/5/2006 10:00

Press [Register/Edit]. The address book appears.

Select a destination (individual or group) to add to the One-touch Key
number.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

System Menu
Pressing [Detail]
shows the detailed
information of the
selected destination.

Edit Destination - Register
Name

Sort
No.

Type

Name

0003

CCC

0004

DDD

0005

EEE

0006

FFF

0007
ABC

ABC@DEF.com

GHI

E-mail

Search(Name)
Search(No.)
2/3

GGG
DEF

Detail

qwe@rty.com
JKL

MNO PQRS

TUV

WXYZ

0-9
Group

Folder

Cancel

Status

10/5/2006

10:10

NOTE: Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or
address number. Refer to the Operation Guide for Address List.

Press [OK]. The destination will be added to the One-touch Key.

Editing One-touch Key
Edit/delete the destinations you added to One-touch Key.
Use the procedure below to select the interface.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Edit Destination] and then [Register/Edit] of One-touch Key.

Select a One-touch Key number (001 to 100) for the destination. Pressing
[No.] enables direct entry of a One-touch Key number.
The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited.

Changing the Registered Information

Press
[Register/Edit].

Edit Destination - One-touch Key
Register a one-touch key.

001
AAA

002
BBB

003
CCC

004

005

006

007

008

009

010

011

012

013

014

015

016

017

018

019

020

No.
Register
/Edit
Delete
001/005

Detail

Close
Status

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

10/5/2006 10:00

6-83

System Menu

Select a new
destination
(individual or
group).
Pressing
[Detail] shows
the detailed
information of
the selected
destination.

Edit Destination - Register
Name

Sort
No.

Type

Name

0003

CCC

0004

DDD

0005

EEE

0006

FFF

0007
ABC

Detail

ABC@DEF.com

2/3

GGG
DEF

GHI

E-mail

Search(Name)
Search(No.)

Detail

qwe@rty.com
JKL

MNO PQRS

TUV

WXYZ

0-9
Group

Folder

Cancel

Status

10/5/2006

10:10

NOTE: Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or
address number. Refer to the Operation Guide for Address List.

Press [OK].

Press [Yes] on the screen to add the destination to the One-touch
Key.

Deleting the Registered Information

Press [Delete].

Edit Destination - One-touch Key
Register a one-touch key.

001
AAA

002
BBB

003
CCC

004

005

006

007

008

009

010

011

012

013

014

015

016

017

018

019

020

No.
Register
/Edit
Delete
001/005

Detail

Close
Status

6-84

10/5/2006 10:00

Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm the deletion of the data
registered in the One-touch Key.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

System Menu

System Initialization
Initialize the hard disk mounted on the machine to return to the default
mode.

CAUTION: System initialization will delete Custom Document Boxes,
data stored in Document Box, addresses in the Address Book, user
property, account information, and settings.

NOTE: This item will not be displayed if the optional Security Kit is
installed. Refer to Security on page 8-1 about the functions added when
the Security Kit is installed and related procedures.
Using KM-Net for Clients allows you to backup addresses in the Address
Book.
Using the FAX Backup Kit (optional) allows you to backup Job accounting
data.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [T], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Execute] of System
Initialization.

If user login is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your
login user name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need
to log in with administrator privileges. The default login user name and
password are both “5050”.

Press [Yes].

Adjustment/Maintenance
Copy Density Adjustment:

Change

Send/Box Density Adjust.:

Print Density:

Correcting Black Line:

Change

Execute
This will be formatted.
Are you sure?

Execute

This process may take some time.
Display Brightness:

Charger Auto Cleaning:

Change
Yes

Return to Top
Status

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Close
10/5/200 6

10:10

Once the initialization ends, the message Task is completed. Turn the
main power switch off and on. appears. Turn the main power switch off.

6-85

System Menu

Restarting the System
Restart the CPU without turning the main power switch off. Use this to deal
with any unstable operation by the machine. (Same as the computer
restart.)
Use the procedure below to select the interface.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [System] and
[Execute] of Restart.

System
Network:

Execute

Restart:

Network Security:

Return to Top
Status

Press [Yes] to
restart the machine.

Close
10/ 5/2006

10:10

System
Network:

Change

Execute

Network Security:

The system will be restarted.
Are you sure?

Yes

Return to Top
Status

6-86

Close
10/ 5/2006

10:10

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

System Menu

SSL Network Security
This function allows you to use SSL network security for communication.
Use the procedure below to specify the SSL settings.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [System], [Next] in Network Security, and then [Change] in SSL.

NOTE: If user login is disabled, the user authentication screen appears.
Enter your login user name and password and then press [Login]. For
this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. The default login user
name and password are both “5050”.

Press [On].

System - SSL
Use SSL for communication.

Off

Cancel
Status

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

6-87

System Menu

Accessibility (Enlarged Touch Panel Display)
Touch panel characters and key displays can be enlarged. Use the
numeric keys to select items and proceed to the next screen.

NOTE: Accessibility can be used only with Copying and Sending
registered on the Quick Setup screen.
To set functions other than those displayed in the accessibility screens,
you must return to the original display. Press the Accessibility Display key
again.
Press the Accessibility Display
key when in the Copy or Send (i.e.
the Copy or Send key indicator is
On).

Enlarged keys or
characters appear
on the touch panel.
Operation can also
be made by pressing
any numeric key
corresponding to the
number or symbol
displayed. (e.g.
Press the 2 key to
adjust density.)

Ready to copy.

Copies

Interrupt

Quantity

100%

Auto

Off

Zoom

Density

Staple

Book
>>1-sided
Duplex

Text+Photo

Collate

Original
Image

Collate/
Offset

Status

10/5/200 6

10:10

Follow the instructions on the screen for subsequent operations.

6-88

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

7 Management
This chapter explains the following operations.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

•
•

User Login Administration ............................................ 7-2
Job Accounting............................................................7-11

•

Security Kit Operations............................................... 7-24

7-1

Management

User Login Administration
User login administration specifies how the user access is administered on
this machine. Enter correct login user name and password for user
authentication to log in.
Access privileges are in two types - User and Administrator. Certain items
in System Menu can be modified only by administrators.

First User Login Administration
Follow these steps for the first user login administration.
Enable user login administration. (page 7-2)
T
Add a user.(page 7-5)
T
Log out.(page 7-4)
T
The registered user logs in for operations.(page 7-4)

Enabling/Disabling User Login Administration
This enables user login administration. Select one of the following
authentication methods:
Item

Description

Local Authentic.

User authentication based on user properties on
the local user list stored in the machine.

Network
Authentic.

User authentication based on Authentication
Server. Use a user property stored in
Authentication Server to access the network
authentication login page.

Use the procedure below to enable user login administration.

7-2

Press the System Menu key.

Press [User Login/Job Accounting].

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Management

Press [Next] of User Login Setting and then [Change] of User Login.

Select [Local
Authentic.] or
[Network
Authentic.]. Select
[Off] to disable user
login administration.

User Login/Job Accounting - User Login
User login administration.
Please select authentication method.

Off
Host Name
Local
Authentic.

Domain Name

Network
Authentic.

If you select
Server Type
[Network
Kerberos
NTLM
(WinNT)
(Win2000/2003)
Authentic.], enter
the host name (62
Cancel
OK
characters or less)
and domain name
(254 characters or less) for the Authentication Server. Select
[NTLM(WinNT)] or [Kerberos(Win2000/2003)] as the authentication
method.
Status

10/5/2006

10:10

NOTE: If the login user name and password are rejected, check the
following settings.
•

Network Authentication setting of the machine

•

User property of the Authentication Server

•

Clock time setting of the machine and the Authentication Server

If you cannot login because of the setting of the machine, login with any
administrator registered in the local user list and correct the settings.
If the server type is [Kerberos (Win2000/2003)], only domain names
entered in uppercase will be recognized.

Press [OK].

Login/Logout
Once you enable user login administration, a user ID and password entry
screen appears each time you use this machine.
Log in using the procedure below.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

7-3

Management
Login

If the screen below
appears during the
operations, press
[Login User Name].

Enter login user name and password.

abcdef

********

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Enter the login user name and press [OK].

NOTE: Refer to the Operation Guide for details on entering characters.

Press [Login Password].

Enter the login password and press [OK].

NOTE: When job accounting is enabled, you can use the [Counter
Check] key after you enter your login user name and login password.
Pressing [Counter Check] enables you to refer to the number of pages
printed and the number of pages scanned.

Check the login user name and password are correct, and press [Login].

Logout
To log out the machine, press the Logout key to return to the login user
name/login password entry screen.

7-4

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Management
Auto Logout
Logout is automatically executed in the following cases:
•

When the Power key is pressed to enter the sleep mode

•

When auto sleep is activated

•

When auto reset is activated

Adding a User
This adds a new user. You can add Up to 1,000 users (including the default
login user name). The table below explains the user information to be
registered.
Item

Description

User Name*

Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32
characters).

Enter the login user name to log in (up to 64
characters). The same login user name cannot be
registered.

Enter the password to log in (up to 64 characters).

Access Level*

Select User or Administrator for user access
privileges.

Account Name

Add an account where the user belongs. The user,
who registered his/her account name, can log in
without entering the account ID. Refer to Job
Accounting on page 7-11.

E-mail Address

The user can register his/her E-mail address. The
registered address will be automatically selected
for subsequent operations that need any E-mail
function.

Mandatory at user registration.

NOTE: By default, one default user with administrator rights is already
stored. This user's properties are:
User Name:
Admin
Login user name: 5050
Login Password: 5050
Access Level:
Administrator
It is recommended to periodically change the user name, login user name
and login password regularly for your security.
Use the procedure below to register a new user.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

7-5

Management

Press the System Menu key.

Press [User Login/Job Accounting].

Press [Next] of User Login Setting, [Register/Edit] of Local User List, and
then [Add].

Press [Change] of
User Name.

User:**
User Name:

Change

User0099
Login User Name:

Detail

0099
Access Level:

Change

********
Change

User
E-mail Address:

Account Name:

Detail

Account02
Change

abcd@efg.com

Cancel

Status

10:10

Enter the user name and press [OK].

NOTE: Refer to the Operation Guide for details on entering characters.

7-6

Enter the login user name and E-mail address following 6 and 7 above.

Press [Change] of Login Password and then [Login Password].

Enter the login password and press [OK].

Press [Confirm Login Password].

Enter the same login password to confirm and press [OK].

Press [Change] of Access Level.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Management

Select the user
access privilege and
press [OK].

User:** - Access Level
Set user access privileges.

User

Administrator

Cancel

Status

10/5/2006

Press [Change] of Account Name.

Select the account
and press [OK].

10:10

User:** - Account Name
Select account to which this user will be attached.
Sort

File Name
Account Name
Account01

00001000

Account02

00002000

Account03

00003000

Account04

00004000

Account05

Name

Size

Account ID
Search(Name)
Search(ID)
1/2

00005000
Detail
Close

Status

10/5/2006

10:10

NOTE: Select [Name] and [ID] from the Sort pull-down menu to sort the
account list.
Press [Search(Name)] or [Search(ID)] to search by account name or
account ID.

Press [Register] to add a new user on the local user list.

Changing User Properties
User properties can be changed. Types of user properties that could be
changed may be different depending on user access privilege.
For a user with administrator rights who logs in
User properties can be changed and users can be deleted. The items,
which can be added, are all able to be changed.
Use the procedure below to select the interface.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [User Login/Job Accounting].

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

7-7

Management

Press [Next] of User Login Setting and [Register/Edit] of Local User List.

Select the user whose properties you wish to change.

NOTE: Select [Name] and [Login Name] from the Sort pull-down menu to
sort the user list.
Press [Search(Name)] or [Search(Login)] to search by name or login user
name.
The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited.
Changing user information

Press [Detail].

Refer to steps 6 to
16 of Adding a User
to change a user
property.

User:**
User Name:

Change

User01
Login User Name:

Detail

0123
Access Level:

Change

********
Change

Administrator
E-mail Address:

Account Name:

Detail

Account01
Change

kyo@efg.com

Cancel

Status

10:10

Press [Register].

Press [Yes] in the registration confirmation screen. The user information is
changed.

Deleting a user

Press [Delete].

Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm deletion. The selected user will be
deleted.

NOTE: The default user with administrator rights cannot be deleted.
For a user without administrator rights who logs in
These users can partially change their own user properties including user
name, login password, and E-mail address.
Although login user name, access level, or account name cannot be
changed, the users can check the present status.
Use the procedure below to select the interface.

7-8

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Management

Press the System Menu key.

Press [User Property].

Refer to steps 6 to 16 of Adding a User to change user properties.
Press [Detail] of
Login User Name or
Account Name to
check the present
status.

User:**
User Name:

Change

User01
Login User Name:

Detail

0123

Change

********

Access Level:

Account Name:

User
E-mail Address:

Detail

Account01
Change

kyo@efg.com

Cancel

Status

10:10

Press [Register] to finalize changed user properties.

Unknown login user name Job
This specifies the behavior for handling the jobs sent with unknown login
user names (i.e. unsent IDs). If the User Login is set to invalid and Job
Accounting is set to valid, follow the procedure when the Account ID is
unknown.
The table below shows the available settings.
Item

Description

Reject

The job is rejected (not printed).

Permit

The job is permitted to be printed.

Use the procedure below to select the interface.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [User Login/Job Accounting].

Press [Change] of Unknown lD Job.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

7-9

Management

Press [Reject] or
[Permit].

User Login/Job Accounting - Unknown ID Job
Select what to do with jobs from unknown user names
or account IDs.

Reject

Permit

Cancel
Status

7-10

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Management

Job Accounting
Job accounting Manages the copy/print count accumulated by individual
accounts by assigning an ID to each account.
Job accounting helps the following activities in business organizations.
•

Manageability of up to 1,000 individual accounts.

•

Availability for account IDs with as many as eight digits (between 0 and
99999999) for security.

•

Integrated management of printing and scanning statistics through the
use of an identical account ID.

•

Tracking the print volume for each account and for all accounts
combined.

•

Restricting the print counter in one-page increments up to 999,999
copies.

•

Resetting the print counter for each account or for all accounts
combined.

First Job Accounting Setup
Follow these steps for the first job accounting setup.
Enable job accounting. (page 7-11)
T
Add an account. (page 7-13)
T
Log out. (page 7-13)
T
Other users log in for operations. (page 7-12)

Enabling/Disabling Job Accounting
Enable job accounting. Use the procedure below to select the interface.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [User Login/Job Accounting].

Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting, and then [Change] of Job
Accounting.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

7-11

Management

Press [On]. To
disable job
accounting, press
[Off].

User Login/Job Accounting - Job Accounting
Access the job accounting function.

Off

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

NOTE: When the display returns to the System Menu default screen,
logout is automatically executed and the screen to enter the Account ID
appears. To continue the operation, enter the Account ID.

Login/Logout
If job accounting is enabled, an account ID entry screen appears each time
you use this machine.
Use the procedure below to login and logout.
Login

In the screen below,
enter the account ID
using the numeric
keys and press
[Login].

Enter account ID.

******

Check the counter.
Status

10:10

NOTE: If you entered a wrong character, press the Clear key and enter
the account ID again.
If the entered account ID does not match the registered ID, a warning beep
will sound and login will fail. Enter the correct account ID.
By pressing [Counter Check], you can refer to the number of pages printed
and the number of pages scanned.

7-12

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Management
When the screen to enter the login user name and password appears
If user login administration is enabled, the screen to enter the login user
name and password appears. Enter a login user name and password to log
in. (Refer to Login/Logout on page 7-3.) If the user has already registered
the account information, the account ID entry would be skipped. (Refer to
Adding a User on page 7-5.)

Proceed to complete the rest of the steps.

Logout
When the operations are complete, press the Logout key to return to the
account ID entry screen.

Adding an Account
This section explains how to add a new account. The following entries are
required.
Item

Description

Account Name

Enter the account name (up to 32 characters).

Account ID

Enter the account ID as many as eight digits
(between 0 and 99999999).

Restriction

This Prohibits printing/scanning or restricts the
number of sheets to load. Refer to Restricting the
Use of the Machine on page 7-16.

Use the procedure below to register a new account.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [User Login/Job Accounting].

Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting, [Register/Edit] of Accounting List,
and then [Add].

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

7-13

Management

Press [Change] of
Account Name.

Account:**
Account Name:

Change

Account01
Account ID:

Change

00001000
Print Restriction Copier:

Change

Off
Scan Restriction Others:

Print Restriction Printer:

Change

Off

FAX TX Restriction:

Change

Off

Cancel

Status

Change

Off

10:10

Enter the account name and press [OK]. The Account screen reappears.

NOTE: Refer to the Operation Guide for details on entering characters.

Follow steps 5 and 6 above to enter the Account ID.

NOTE: Any account ID that has already registered cannot be used. Enter
any other account ID.

Activate or deactivate restriction. Refer to Restricting the Use of the
Machine on page 7-16.

Press [Register] to add a new account on the Account List.

Managing Accounts
This changes the registered account information or deletes the account.
Use the procedure below to select the interface.

7-14

Press the System Menu key.

Press [User Login/Job Accounting].

Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting and then [Register/Edit] of
Accounting List.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Management

Select an account to
change or delete.

User Login/Job Accounting - Accounting List
Register an account that is permitted to use this machine. (Up to 1000 can be registered.)
Sort
Account Name

Name
Account ID

Account01

00001000

Account02

00002000

Account03

00003000

Account04

00004000

Account05

00005000
Detail

Search(Name)
Search(ID)
1/2
Add

Delete

Close
Status

10/5/2006

10:10

NOTE: Select [Name] or [ID] from the Sort pull-down menu to sort the
account names.
Press [Search(Name)] or [Search(ID)] to search by account name or
account ID.
The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited.
Changing account information

Press [Detail].

Refer to steps
5 to 9 of Adding
an Account and
steps 2 to 5 of
Restricting
Using the
Machine to
change
account
information.

Account:**
Account Name:

Change

Account01
Account ID:

Change

00001000
Print Restriction Copier:

Change

999,999
Scan Restriction Others:
Off

Print Restriction Printer:

Change

FAX TX Restriction:

Change

Off

Cancel
Status

Change

999,999

Press [Register].

Press [Yes] in the registration confirmation screen. The account
information is changed.

10:10

Deleting an account

Press [Delete].

Press [Yes] To delete the account.

Managing the Copy/Print Counts
You can select how the copying and printing page counts are shown either the total of both or each of copying and printing individually. The
selection may influence restriction on the count and count method. Refer
to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 7-16, Counting the Number

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

7-15

Management
of Pages Printed on page 7-18 and Printing an Accounting Report on page
7-22 for details.
Use the procedure below to set the counting methods.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [User Login/Job Accounting].

Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting, [Next] of Default Setting and then
[Change] of Copier/Printer Count.

Press [Total] or
[Split].

User Login/Job Accounting - Copier/Printer Count
Select the copier and printer count method.

Total

Split

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

Restricting the Use of the Machine
This section explains how to restrict the use of the machine by account or
the number of sheets available.
Restriction Items
Print Restriction Copier
The number of sheets copiable is restricted. This is displayed when Split
mode is selected for Managing the Copy/Print Count.
Print Restriction Printer
•

When Split is selected for Managing the Copy/Print Count
The number of sheets copiable is restricted.

•

When Total is selected for Managing the Copy/Print Count
The total number of sheets copiable and printable is restricted.

7-16

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Management
Scan Restriction Others
The number of sheets scannable (except for copy) is restricted.
Fax TX Restriction
The number of sheets sendable by fax is restricted. This is displayed when
the optional fax kit is installed.
Applying Restriction
Restriction can be applied in two modes as follows:
Item

Description

Off

No restriction given

Counter Limit

Restricts the print counter in one-page increments
up to 999,999 copies.

Reject Usage

Restriction is applied.

Use the procedure below to select the interface.

Follow steps 1 to 4 of Adding an Account on page 7-13.

Press [Change] of Print Restriction Copier, Print Restriction Printer, Scan
Restriction Others, or FAX TX Restriction.

Select [Off], [Counter Limit], or [Reject Usage].
If [Counter Limit] is
selected, press [+],
[-] or numeric keys to
select the number of
pages.

Account:** - Print Restriction Copier
Restrict use of the functions.

Off
Limit(1 - 999999)
Counter Limit

page(s)

Split

Cancel
Status

Press [OK].

Repeat steps 2 to 3 for other accounts to be restricted.

Press [Register].

The restricted account is added.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

7-17

Management
Applying Limit of Restriction
This specifies how the machine behaves when the counter has reached
the limit of restriction. The table below describes the action taken.
Item

Description

Immediately *

Job stops when the counter reaches its limit.

Subsequently

Printing/scanning of the job continues but the
subsequent job will be rejected.

Alert Only

Job continues while displaying an alert message.

The next job will be prohibited in sending or in storing in the box.

Use the procedure below to select the interface.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [User Login/Job Accounting].

Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting, [Next] of Default Setting and then
[Change] of Apply Limit.

Select
[Immediately],
[Subsequently], or
[Alert Only].

User Login/Job Accounting - Apply Limit
Select what to do when the counter goes over its limit.

Immediately

Subsequently

Alert Only

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

Counting the Number of Pages Printed
This counts the number of pages printed. Counts are classified into Total
Job Accounting and Each Job Accounting. A new count can also be started
after resetting the count data which was stored for a certain period of time.

7-18

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Management
Types of the counts are as follows.
Item
Print Pages (by
Function)

Description
•

When Split is selected for Managing the Copy/
Print Count:
Number of pages copied, printed, faxed*, and
the total number of those pages are displayed.

•

When Total is selected for Managing the Copy/
Print Count:
Number of pages printed (by copier and printer),
number of pages faxed*, and the total number of
those pages are displayed.

Print Pages (1 or
2 sided)**

Number of pages for 1 sided, 2 sided, as well as
the total pages are displayed.

Scan Pages

Number of pages scanned for copier, other
function, as well as the total pages are displayed

FAX
Transmission
Pages*

Number of fax pages sent is displayed.

FAX
Transmission
Time*

Total duration of Fax transmission is displayed.

*
**

Only displayed when the optional fax kit is installed.
Only referenced in total job accounting.

Total Job Accounting/Resetting the Counter
This counts the number of pages for all accounts and resets the counts for
those accounts together at the same time.
Use the procedure below to select the interface.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [User Login/Job Accounting].

Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting and then [Next] of Total Job
Accounting.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

7-19

Management

Press [Check] at the
function to check the
count. The results
will be displayed.

User Login/Job Accounting - Total Job Accounting
Print Pages(by Function):

Check

Scan Pages:

Check

Counter Reset:

Execute

Print Pages(1 or 2 sided):
User01

Check

Close
10/5/2006

Status

Confirm the count and press [Close].

Press [Execute] of Counter Reset to reset the counter.

Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm the reset. The counter is reset.

10:10

Each Job Accounting/Resetting the Counter
This counts the number of pages for each account and resets the counts
by account.
Use the procedure below to select the interface.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [User Login/Job Accounting].

Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting and [Check] of Each Job
Accounting.

Select the account
to check the count.

User Login/Job Accounting - Each Job Accounting
Maintain a separate counter for each account (department).
Sort
Account Name
Account06

Name
Account ID

00006000

Search(Name)

Others

Search(ID)
2/2

Detail

Close
Status

7-20

10/5/2006

10:10

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Management

NOTE: Select [Name] or [ID] from the Sort pull-down menu to sort the
account names.
Press [Search(Name)] or [Search(ID)] to search by account name or
account ID.

Press [Detail].

Press [Check] at the
function to check the
count. The results
will be displayed.

Account:**
Print Pages(by Function):

Check

Scan Pages:

Check

Counter Reset:

Execute

Print Pages(1 or 2 sided):
User01

Check

Close
Status

Confirm the count and press [Close].

Press [Execute] of Counter Reset to reset the counter.

10/5/2006

10:10

Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm the reset. The counter will be reset.

Counting by Paper Size
This counts the number of pages by paper size (e.g. Letter).

NOTE: Paper size is available in five types, - 1 to 5. These types are
specified in accounting reports. Refer to Printing an Accounting Report on
page 7-22.
In addition to paper size, media type can also be specified (e.g. count the
letter-size color paper used). If no media type is specified, usage is
counted for all media types of that size.
Use the procedure below to select the interface.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [User Login/Job Accounting].

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

7-21

Management

Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting, [Next] of Default Setting, [Change]
of Count by Paper Size, [Change] of Paper Size 1 to 5 and then [On].

Select the paper
size.

User Login/Job Accounting - Paper Size 1
Select the paper sizes and types to count.

Off

Folio

Ledger

Legal

All Media
Types

Letter

Statement

Plain

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

Press [Media Type] to specify media type.

Select the media type and press [OK].

Press [OK].

10:10

Printing an Accounting Report
Total pages counted at all relevant accounts can be printed as an
accounting report.
Reports have different formats depending on how the count of copiers and
printers is administered.
When Split is selected for Managing the Copy/Print Count

ACCOUNT.REPORT
KM-5050
Firmware Version

7-22

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Management
For the count by paper size, the report will be printed by size.
Use the procedure below to print a job accounting report.

Check that Letter or A4 paper is loaded in the cassette.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [User Login/Job Accounting].

Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting and then [Print] of Print Accounting
Report.

Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm the printing.

Unknown Account ID Jobs
The behavior of the machine when it receives a job from unknown account
ID (i.e. unsent ID) can be specified. Refer to Unknown login user name
Job on page 7-9 for details.

Checking and Printing Counter
Press the Counter
key to check the
number of sheets
printed and
scanned.

Counter
Printed Page Counts
Copy
Monochrome:

Printer
25,000

Total
30,000

55,000

Scanned Page Counts
Copy
Originals:
Print
Status Page
Status

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Others
25,000

Total
20,000

45,000
Close
10/5/2006

10:10

7-23

Management

Security Kit Operations
Installing the optional Security Kit adds [Security] on the System Menu.
Refer to Security on page 8-1 for the descriptions and operations related
to the (Security) options.

7-24

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

8 Security
This chapter explains the procedures and tips for installation
and operation of the optional Data Security Kit (C) (Security
Kit).
Instructions for General Users (for Both General Users and
Administrators)
•
•

Security Kit Functions................................................... 8-2
Touch Panel Display after the Security Kit is Installed . 8-4

Instructions for Administrators (for Those in Charge of
Installation and Operation of the Security Kit)

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

•

Installing the Security Kit .............................................. 8-5

•
•

Changing Security Functions ....................................... 8-6
System Initialization...................................................... 8-8

•

Warning Message ........................................................ 8-9

8-1

Security

Instructions for General Users (for Both General Users and Administrators)
Security Kit Functions
The security kit enables overwriting and encryption.

NOTE: If you install the security kit, Running security function appears
when the machine starts up and it may take a while.

Overwriting
Multi-functional products (MFPs) temporarily store the data of scanned
originals and print jobs, as well as other data stored by users, in the hard
disk, and the data is output from the hard disk for printing. As the data
storage area used for such data remains in the hard disk as is until it is
overwritten by other data, the data stored here remains restorable using
special tools for undesirable use.
The security kit deletes and overwrites (hereinafter collectively referred to
as overwrite(s)) the unnecessary data storage area used for the output
data or deleted data to ensure that data cannot be restored.
Overwriting is performed automatically, without user intervention.

NOTE: When you cancel a job, the machine immediately starts

overwriting the data that has been already stored in the hard disk.
Overwrite Methods
There are two overwrite methods, which can be switched at any time.
Once Overwrite Method
Overwrite a target storage area of the hard disk (for overwriting) or entire
hard disk (for system initialization) with zeroes to disable data restoration.
3-time Overwrite Method (default)
Overwrite the same target storage area of the hard disk as mentioned
above with a random pattern twice and then with zeroes to prevent data
restoration. This method with its higher degree of security makes data
restoration much more difficult than the Once Overwrite method even by a
sophisticated restoration tool.
This method may take more time than Once Overwrite method to process
a larger amount of data.

8-2

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Security

Encryption
MFPs store the data of scanned originals and other data stored by users
in the hard disk. It means the data could be possibly leaked or tampered
with if the hard disk is stolen.
The security kit encrypts data before storing it in the hard disk. It
guarantees higher security because no data cannot be decoded by
ordinary output or operations.
Encryption is automatically performed and no special procedure is
required.

CAUTION: Encryption helps enhance security. However, the data stored
in the Document Box can be decoded by ordinary operations. Do not store
any strictly confidential data in the Document Box.

Functions of Security Kit

Security Kit
1. Overwrite unwanted area of data.
2. Encryption (
) / Decoding (

)

Send
Copying
Send

Sending
Save original data
and various settings
Printing

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Hard
disk

8-3

Security

Touch Panel Display after the Security Kit is Installed
Hard Disk Icon Display
In Security Mode,
the security kit has
been properly
installed and is
running. The hard
disk icon appears on
the lower right side
of the touch panel in
Security Mode.

Ready to copy.

Copies

Interrupt

Copy Image

Set Original.
Auto
Original : - - : 100%
Zoom
: --Paper
Preview
Quick Setup

Zoom
1-sided
>>1-sided
Duplex
Org./Paper/
Finishing

Normal 0

Letter
Plain

Density
Text+Photo

Paper
Selection
Collate

Original
Image
Image
Quality

Collate/
Offset
Layout/Edit

Status

Advanced
Setup
10/5/200 6

10:10

NOTE: If the hard disk icon does not appear on the normal screen, it is
possible that the Security Mode is not ON. Call service.
The hard disk icon display changes as follows during overwriting
The table below shows the icons displayed and their descriptions.
Icon displayed

Description
There is unwanted data on the hard
disk.
Overwriting the unwanted data

The unwanted data is overwritten.

CAUTION: Do not turn the main power switch off during overwriting (while
is displayed). It may crash the hard disk.

NOTE: If you turn the machine off at the main power switch during
overwriting, data may not be overwritten completely from the hard disk.
Turn the machine back on at the main power switch. Overwriting
automatically resumes. If you accidentally turn the main power switch off
during overwriting or initialization, the hard disk icon might not switch to
the second icon shown above. This would be caused by a possible crash
or failed overwriting of the data to be overwritten. This will not affect
subsequent overwriting processes. However, system initialization is
recommended so as to return to normal stable operations. (Initialization
should be performed by the administrator following the steps in System
Initialization on page 8-8.)

8-4

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Security

Instructions for Administrators (for Those in Charge of Installation and
Operations of the Security Kit)

Installing the Security Kit
The Security Kit Contents
The security kit package includes:
•

Security key

•

Installation manual (for service personnel)

•

The system will be initialized during installation of the security kit. This
means that the data stored in the hard disk will be all overwritten.
Special attention should be given if you install the security kit on the
MFP currently used.

•

The Repeat Copy function will be unavailable after the installation.

•

[Adjustment/Maintenance] -> [System Initialization] will not be
displayed in the System Menu after the installation.

•

[Security] will be added in the System Menu after the installation.

Before Installation

Installation
Installation of the security kit should be performed by the service
personnel.
The only thing required by the administrator during the installation is to
enter the encryption code.
Encryption Code
An encryption code of 6 alphanumeric characters (0 to 9, A to Z, a to z) to
encrypt data needs to be entered. By default, the code is set 000000.
As an encryption key is then created from this code, it is safe enough to
continue using the default code.

CAUTION: Be sure to remember the encryption code you entered. If you
need to enter the encryption code again for some reason and you do not
enter the same encryption code, all the data stored on the hard disk will be
overwritten as a security precaution.

After Installation
After installing the security kit, you can change the security password as
well as the method for overwriting the entire hard disk.
The changes could be given as required, either at installation or later.
Refer to page 8-6 for the procedures.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

8-5

Security

Changing Security Functions
Changing Security Password
Enter the security password to change security functions. You can
customize the security password so that only the administrator can use the
security kit.
Use the procedure below to change the security password.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [T] and then [Security].

Enter the default security password, 000000.

Press [Change] of Security Password.

Press [Password] to
enter a new security
password 6 to 16
alphanumeric
characters.

Security - Security Password
Set password.
Please enter new password, then re-enter it to confirm.

Password
Confirm
Password

Cancel
Status

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

CAUTION: Avoid any easy-to-guess numbers for the security password
(e.g. 11111111 or 12345678).

Press [Confirm Password] to enter the same password again.

Press [OK].

Changing the Method for Overwriting the Entire Hard Disk
Change the method for overwriting the entire hard disk. Refer to Overwrite
Methods on page 8-2 for details.

NOTE: The overwrite methods are used both for overwriting and system
initialization (page 8-8), and cannot therefore be set individually.

8-6

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Security
Use the procedure below to select the interface.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [T] and then [Security].

Enter the security password. By default, the code is set 000000.

Press [Data Overwrite Method].

Press [3-time
Overwrite Method]
(default) or [Once
Overwrite Method].

Security - Data Overwrite Method
Select data overwrite method.

Once
Overwrite

3-time
Overwrite

Cancel
Status

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

OK
10/5/2006

10:10

Press [OK].

8-7

Security

System Initialization
Overwrite all the data stored in the hard disk when disposing of the
machine.

CAUTION: If you accidentally turn the main power switch off during
initialization, the hard disk might possibly crash or initialization might fail.

NOTE: If you accidentally turn the main power switch off during
initialization, turn the main power switch on again. Initialization
automatically restarts.
Use the procedure below to initialize the system.

Press the System Menu key.

Press [T] and then [Security].

If the user authentication screen appears, enter the login user name and
login password, and press [Login].
If the user authentication screen does not appear, go to Step 5.

Enter the default security password, 000000.

Press [Execute] of
System Initialization.

Security
Data Overwrite Method:

Change

System Initialization:

Execute

Security Password:

Change

Close
Status

8-8

10/5/2006

10:10

Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm the initialization. Initialization starts.

When the screen appears to show initialization is completed, press the
Power key, check that the Power key and memory indicators are OFF,
and turn the main power switch off and then on.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Security

Warning Message
If the encryption
code information of
the machine has
been lost for some
reason, the screen
shown here appears
when the power is
turned on.

Enter the encryption code.

Encryption
Code

Follow the steps
below.

Press [Encryption Code], and enter the encryption code that was entered
during the installation of the security kit.

CAUTION: Even though entering a different encryption code can also
enable continuation of a job, this will overwrite all the data stored in the
hard disk. Exercise extreme caution when entering an encryption code.
The encryption code is not the same as the security password.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Press the Power key and confirm that the Power key/indicator and the
memory indicator are off. After that, turn the main power switch off and on.

8-9

Security

8-10

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Appendix
•
•

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Paper............................................................... Appendix-2
Glossary ........................................................ Appendix-10

Appendix-1

Appendix

Paper
Basic Paper Specifications
This machine is designed to print on standard copy paper as used in
regular ('dry') copiers and page printers such as laser printers. It also
supports a variety of other types of paper that conform to the specifications
given in this appendix.
Be careful when choosing paper. Paper unsuitable for the machine may
cause jams or may be wrinkled.
Supported Paper
Use standard copy paper for regular copiers or laser printers. The printing
quality will be affected by the quality of paper. Poor quality paper may
result in unsatisfactory output.
Basic Paper Specifications
The following table lists the specifications of paper that is supported with
this machine. Refer to the subsequent sections for further details.
Criteria
Weight

Specifications
Cassettes: 60 to 105 g/m2
Multi Purpose tray: 45 to 200 g/m2

Thickness

0.086 to 0.110 mm

Dimensional accuracy

±0.7 mm

Squareness of corners

90° ±0.2°

Moisture content

4 to 6%

Grain direction

Long grain (paper supply direction)

Pulp content

80% or more

NOTE: Some recycled paper does not meet requirements for use with
this machine as listed in the Basic Paper Specifications shown below,
such as moisture or pulp content. For this reason, we recommend
purchasing a small amount of recycled paper as a sample for testing prior
to use. Choose recycled paper that gives the best printing results and
contains low levels of paper dust.
We are not responsible for the problems occurred from the use of paper
that does not conform to our specifications.

Choosing the Appropriate Paper
This section describes guidelines for choosing paper.

Appendix-2

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Appendix
Condition
Avoid using paper with bent corners or that is curled, dirty, or torn. Do not
use paper that has a rough surface or paper fiber lint, or that is especially
delicate. Use of paper in any of these conditions will not only deliver poor
copies but may also cause jams and shorten the useful life of the machine.
Choose paper with a smooth and even surface; however, avoid coated
paper or paper with a treated surface as it may damage the drum or fusing
unit.
Ingredient
Do not use paper such as paper that has been coated or surface-treated
or paper that contains plastic or carbon. These paper may produce harmful
fumes from the heat of printing and may damage the drum.
Be sure to use the standard paper that contains at least 80% pulp, i.e., not
more than 20% of the total paper content consists of cotton or other fibers.
Supported Paper Sizes
Paper of the following sizes is supported by the machine.
Measurements in the table take into account a ±0.7 mm dimensional
accuracy for length and width. Corner angles must be 90° ± 0.2°.
Multi Purpose Tray

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Cassette or Multi Purpose
Tray

A6-R (105 × 148 mm)

A3 (297 × 420 mm)

B6-R (128 × 182 mm)

B4 (257 × 364 mm)

Hagaki (100×148mm)

A4 (297 × 210 mm)

Oufuku Hagaki (148 × 200 mm)

A4-R (210 × 297 mm)

Executive (7 1/4 ×10 1/2")

B5 (257 × 182 mm)

Envelope DL (110 × 220 mm)

B5-R (182 × 257 mm)

Envelope C5 (162 × 229mm)

A5-R (148 × 210 mm)

Envelope C4 (229 × 324mm)

Folio (210 × 330 mm)

ISO B5 (176 × 250 mm)

Ledger

Envelope #10 (4 1/8 × 9 1/2")

Legal

Envelope #9 (3 7/8 × 8 7/8")

Letter

Envelope #6 (3 5/8 × 6 1/2")

Letter-R

Envelope Monarch (3 7/8 ×7 1/2")

Statement-R

Youkei 2 (114 × 162 mm)

Oficio II

Youkei 4 (105 × 235 mm)

8.5 × 13.5"

Size Entry (98 × 148 to 297 × 432 mm)

8K (273 × 394 mm)

Appendix-3

Appendix

Multi Purpose Tray

Cassette or Multi Purpose
Tray
16K (273 × 197 mm)
16K-R (197 × 273 mm)

Smoothness
The paper surface should be smooth, but it must be uncoated. With paper
that is too smooth and slippery, several sheets may accidentally be
supplied at once, causing jams.
Basis Weight
In countries that use the metric system, basis weight is the weight in grams
of one sheet of paper one square meter in area. In the United States, basis
weight is the weight in pounds of one ream (500 sheets) of paper cut to the
standard size (or trade size) for a specific grade of paper. Paper that is too
heavy or too light may be supplied incorrectly or cause paper jams, which
may cause excessive wear of the machine. Mixed paper weight (i.e.,
thickness) may cause several sheets to be supplied at once accidentally
and may also cause blurring or other printing problems if the toner fails to
adhere correctly.
The recommended basis weight is between 60 and 105 g/m2 for the
cassettes and between 45 to 200 g/m2 for the Multi Purpose tray.
Thickness
Avoid using paper that is too thick or thin. Signs that paper may be thin
include frequent problems with paper jams or with several sheets being
supplied at once. Paper jams may also indicate that the paper is too thick.
The proper thickness is between 0.086 and 0.110 mm.
Moisture Content
Paper moisture content is the ratio of moisture to dryness expressed as a
percentage. Moisture affects how the paper is supplied, the electrostatic
changeability of the paper, and how the toner adheres.
Paper moisture content varies depending on the relative humidity in the
room. High relative humidity causes paper to become damp, making the
edges expand so it appears wavy. Low relative humidity causes paper to
lose moisture, making the edges tighten and weakening print contrast.
Wavy or tight edges may cause the paper to slip when it is supplied. Try to
keep the moisture content between 4 to 6%.
To maintain the right level of moisture content, bear in mind the following
considerations.

Appendix-4

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Appendix
•

Store paper in a cool, well-ventilated place.

•

Store paper flat and unopened in the package. Once the package is
opened, reseal it if the paper is not to be used for a while.

•

Store paper sealed in the original package and box. Put a pallet under
the carton to keep it raised above the floor. Especially during rainy
seasons keep the paper a sufficient distance away from wooden or
concrete floors.

•

Before using paper that has been stored, keep it at the proper
moisture level for at least 48 hours.

•

Do not store paper where it is exposed to heat, sunlight, or dampness.

Other Paper Specifications
Porosity: The density of the paper fibers
Stiffness: Paper must be stiff enough or it may buckle in the machine,
causing jams.
Curl: Most paper naturally tends to curl after the package is opened. When
paper passes through the fixing unit, it curls upward slightly. To deliver flat
printouts, load the paper so that the curl faces towards the bottom of the
paper tray.
Static electricity: During printing, paper is electrostatically charged so
that the toner adheres. Choose paper that can be discharged quickly so
that copies do not cling together.
Whiteness: Paper whiteness affects print contrast. Use whiter paper for
sharper, brighter copies.
Quality: Machine problems may occur if sheet sizes are not uniform or if
corners are not square, edges are rough, sheets are uncut, or edges or
corners are crushed. In order to prevent these problems, be especially
careful when you cut the paper yourself.
Packaging: Choose paper that is properly packaged and stacked in
boxes. Ideally, the packaging itself should have been treated with a coating
to inhibit moisture.
Specially treated paper: We do not recommend printing onto the
following types of paper, even if it conforms to the basic specifications.
When you use these kinds of paper, purchase a small amount first as a
sample to test.
•

Glossy paper

•

Watermarked paper

•

Paper with an uneven surface

•

Perforated paper

Special Paper
This section describes printing onto special paper and print media.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Appendix-5

Appendix
The following paper and media can be used.
•

Transparencies

•

Preprinted paper

•

Bond paper

•

Recycled paper

•

Thin paper (from 60 g/m2 to 64 g/m2 or less)

•

Letterhead

•

Colored paper

•

Prepunched paper

•

Envelopes

•

Cardstocks

•

Thick paper (from 106 g/m2 to 220 g/m2 or less)

•

Labels

•

Coated paper

•

High-quality paper

When using these paper and media, choose that are designed specifically
for copiers or page printers (such as laser printers). Use the Multi Purpose
tray for transparencies, thin or thick paper, envelopes, cardstocks, and
label paper.
Choosing Special Paper
Although special paper that meets the following requirements can be used
with the machine, print quality will vary considerably due to differences in
the construction and quality of special paper. Thus, special paper is more
likely than regular paper to cause printing problems. Before purchasing
special paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the print quality is
satisfactory. General precautions when printing onto special paper are
given below. Note that we are not responsible for any harm to the user or
damage to the machine caused by moisture or specifications of special
paper.
Select a cassette or Multi Purpose tray for special paper.
Transparencies
Transparencies must be able to withstand the heat of printing.
Transparencies must meet the following conditions.
Criteria

Appendix-6

Specifications

Heat resistance

Must withstand at least 190°C

Thickness

0.100 to 0.110 mm

Material

Polyester

Dimensional accuracy

±0.7 mm

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Appendix

Criteria
Squareness of corners

Specifications
90° ±0.2°

To avoid problems, use the Multi Purpose tray for transparencies and load
transparencies with the long side facing the machine.
If transparencies jam frequently at output, try pulling the leading edge of
sheets gently as they are ejected.
Hagaki
Before loading Hagaki into the
Multi Purpose tray, fan them
and align the edges. If the
Hagaki paper is curled,
straighten it before loading.
Printing onto curled Hagaki
may cause jams.

Burrs
Burrs

Use unfolded Oufuku Hagaki
(available at post offices).
Some Hagaki may still have
rough edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side. Remove any
such rough edges by placing the Hagaki on a flat surface and rubbing the
edges gently a few times with a ruler.
Envelopes
Use the Multi Purpose tray for envelopes.
Due to the structure of envelopes, printing evenly over the entire surface
may not be possible in some cases. Thin envelopes in particular may be
wrinkled by the machine in some cases as they pass through. Before
purchasing envelopes in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the print
quality.
Storing envelopes for a long period may cause them to become wrinkled.
Thus, keep the package sealed until you are ready to use them.
Keep the following points in mind.
Do not use envelopes with exposed adhesive. In addition, do not use the
type of envelope in which the adhesive is exposed after the top layer is
peeled off. Serious damage may be caused if the paper covering the
adhesive comes off in the machine.
Do not use envelopes with certain special features. For example, do not
use envelopes with a grommet for winding a string to close the flap or
envelopes with an open or film-covered window.
If paper jams occur, load fewer envelopes at once.
To prevent paper jams when printing onto multiple envelopes, do not allow
more than ten envelopes remain in the output tray at once.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Appendix-7

Appendix
Thick Paper
Before loading thick paper in the Multi Purpose tray, fan it and align the
edges. Some thick paper may still have rough edges developed by a paper
cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges just as with Hagaki
by placing the paper on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few
times with a ruler. Printing onto paper with rough edges may cause jams.

NOTE: If the paper is not supplied correctly even after it is smoothed,
load the paper in the Multi Purpose tray with the leading edge raised a few
millimeters as shown in the figure.
Label
Be sure to feed labels from the Multi Purpose tray.
For selecting labels, use extreme care so that the adhesive may not come
in direct contact with any part of the machine and that the labels are not
easily peeled from the carrier sheet. Adhesives that stick to the drum or
rollers and peeled labels remaining in the machine may cause a failure.
When printing onto labels, you must be liable for the print quality and
possible trouble.
Labels consist of three layers as
shown in the illustration. The
adhesive layer contains materials
that are easily affected by the
force applied in the machine. The
carrier sheet bears the top sheet
until the label is used. This
composition of labels may cause
more problems.

Top sheet
Adhesive layer
Carrier sheet

The label surface must be covered completely with the top sheet. Gaps
between labels may cause peeling of labels, resulting in a serious failure.
Some label paper has large margins on the top sheet. When using such
paper, do not peel these margins from the carrier sheet before completing
output.
Allowed

Not allowed
Top sheet

Carrier sheet

Appendix-8

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Appendix
Use label paper that conforms to the following specifications.
Item

Specifications

Top sheet weight

44 to 74 g/m²

Basis weight
(overall paper weight)

104 to 151 g/m²

Top sheet thickness

0.086 to 0.107 mm

Overall paper thickness

0.115 to 0.145 mm

Moisture content

4 to 6 % (composite)

Colored Paper
Colored paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 2 of
the Appendix. In addition, the pigments in the paper must be able to
withstand the heat of printing (up to 200°C or 392°F).
Preprinted Paper
Preprinted paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 2 of
the Appendix. The colored ink must be able to withstand the heat of
printing. It must be resistant to silicone oil as well. Do not use paper with a
treated surface such as glossy paper used for calendars.
Recycled Paper
Recycled paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 2 of
the Appendix; however, its whiteness may be considered separately.

NOTE: Before purchasing recycled paper in volume, try testing a sample
to ensure that the print quality.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Appendix-9

Appendix

Glossary
Accessibility
The machine is designed featuring good accessibility even for the elderly
and those who are physically challenged or visually impaired. Touch panel
characters can be enlarged while the touch panel is adjustable in two
angles.
Additional Memory
An additional memory (optional) is used for increasing the memory
capacity of this machine as well as enabling to print more sophisticated
data. The 128 MB, 256 MB, or 512 MB modules are available for this
machine. Contact your dealer for the memory modules that can be used on
this machine.
AppleTalk
AppleTalk, which comes with Apple Computer's Mac OS, is a network
protocol. AppleTalk enables file/printer sharing and also enables you to
utilize application software that is on another computer on the same
AppleTalk network.
Auto Form Feed Timeout
During data transmission, the machine may sometimes have to wait until
receiving the next data. This is the auto form feed timeout. When the preset
timeout passes, the machine automatically put paper out. However, no
output is performed if the last page has no data to be printed.
Auto Paper Selection
A function to automatically select paper in the same size as original at
printing
Auto Sleep Mode
A mode designed for electrical power saving, activated when the machine
is left unused or data transfer for a specific period. In Sleep mode, power
consumption is kept to a minimum.
Default Gateway
This indicates the device, such as a computer or router, that serves as the
entrance/exit (gateway) for accessing computers outside the network that
you are on, When no specific gateway is designated for a destination IP
address, data is sent to the host designated as the Default Gateway.
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) that automatically resolves
IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateway addresses on a TCP/IP
network. DHCP minimizes the load of network management employing a

Appendix-10

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Appendix
large number of client computers because it relieves individual clients
including printers from the IP address being assigned.
dpi (dots per inch)
A unit for resolution, representing the number of dots printed per inch (25.4
mm).
EcoPrint Mode
A printing mode that helps save toner. Copies made in this mode are thus
lighter than normal.
Emulation
The function to interpret and execute other printers' page description
languages. The machine emulates operation of Line Printer, IBM
Proprinter, DIABLO 630,EPSON LQ-850, PCL6, KC-GL, KPDL, and KPDL
(automatic).
FTP (File Transfer Protocol)
A protocol to transfer files on the TCP/IP network, whether the Internet or
an intranet. Along with HTTP and SMTP/POP, FTP is now frequently used
on the Internet.
Grayscale
A computer color expression. Displayed images of this sort are typically
composed of shades of gray, varying from black at the weakest intensity to
white at the strongest, without any other colors. Gray levels are displayed
in numerical levels: that is, white and black only for 1 bit; 256 gray levels
(including white and black) for 8 bits; and 65,536 gray levels for 16 bits.
IEEE1284
An international standard for the printer-computer connection established
by Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) in 1994.
IP Address
An Internet protocol address is a unique number that represents a specific
computer or related device on the network. The format of an IP address is
four sets of numbers separated by dots, e.g. 192.168.110.171. Each
number should be between 0 and 255.
KPDL (Kyocera Page Description Language)
Kyocera's PostScript page description language compatible with Adobe
PostScript Level 3.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Appendix-11

Appendix
Multi Purpose (MP) Tray
The paper supply tray on the right side of the machine. Use this tray
instead of the cassettes when printing onto envelopes, Hagaki,
transparencies, or labels.
NetBEUI (NetBIOS Extended User Interface)
An interface, developed by IBM in 1985, as an update from NetBIOS. It
enables more advanced functions on smaller networks than other
protocols such as TCP/IP, etc. It is not suitable for larger networks due to
lack of routing capabilities to choose the most appropriate routes. NetBEUI
has been adopted by IBM for its OS/2 and Microsoft for its Windows as a
standard protocol for file sharing and printing services.
NetWare
Novell's network management software that is able to run on a variety of
operating systems.
Parallel Interface
The parallel interface mounted on the machine is used to receive the print
data from the computer. With this interface, data transfer between the
printer and the computer takes place in 8-bit chunks. This machine can
perform IEEE 1284-compatible by-directional communications.
POP3 (Post Office Protocol 3)
A standard protocol to receive E-mail from the server in which the mail is
stored on the Internet or an intranet.
PostScript
A page description language developed by Adobe Systems. It enables
flexible font functions and highly-functional graphics, allowing higher
quality printing. The first version called Level 1 was launched in 1985,
followed by Level 2 that enabled color printing and two-byte languages
(e.g. Japanese) in 1990. In 1996, Level 3 was released as an update for
the Internet access and PDF format as well as gradual improvements in
implementation technologies.
PPM (prints per minute)
This indicates the number of A4 size printouts made in one minute.
Printer Driver
The software to enable you to print data created on any application
software. The printer driver for the machine is contained in the CD-ROM
enclosed in the package. Install the printer driver on the computer
connected to the machine.

Appendix-12

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Appendix
Send as E-mail
A function to send the image data stored in the machine as an E-mail
attachment. E-mail addresses can be selected from the list or entered at
each time.
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
A protocol for E-mail transmission over the Internet or an intranet. It is used
for transferring mail between mail servers as well as for sending mail from
clients to their servers.
Status Page
The page lists machine conditions, such as the memory capacity, total
number of prints and scans, and paper source settings.
Subnet Mask
A 32-bit numerical value that defines how many bits of the IP address is
specified for the network address to identify the network.
TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol)
TCP/IP is a suite of protocols designed to define the way computers and
other devices communicate with each other over a network.
TWAIN (Technology Without Any Interested Name)
A technical specification for connecting scanners, digital cameras, and
other image equipment to the computers. The TWAIN compatible devices
enable to process image data on any relevant application software. TWAIN
is adopted on a large number of graphic software (e.g. Adobe Photoshop)
and OCR software.
USB (Universal Serial Bus)2.0
A USB interface standard for Hi-Speed USB 2.0. The maximum transfer
rate is 480 Mbps. This machine is equipped with USB 2.0 for high-speed
data transfer.
WIA (Windows Imaging Acquisition)
A function to import images supported after Windows Me/XP from digital
cameras and other peripheral devices.This function replaces what TWAIN
used to do; the feature is provided as a part of Windows functions and
improves ease of operation, so that you import images directly to My
Computer without using any application.

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Appendix-13

Appendix

Appendix-14

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Index

Index
Numerics
1-sided/2-sided Selection 2-11

A
Accessibility 6-88, Appendix-10
Additional Memory Appendix-10
Adjustment/Maintenance 6-63
Auto Color Correction 6-68
Charger Auto Cleaning 6-67
Copy Density Adjustment 6-63
Correcting Fine Black Lines 6-66
Display Brightness 6-67
Drum Refresh 6-65
Print Density 6-64
Send/Box Density 6-64
Silent Mode 6-68
Appendix Appendix-1
AppleTalk 6-58, Appendix-10
Setup 6-58
Auto Form Feed Timeout Appendix-10
Auto Image Rotation 1-49
Auto Paper Selection Appendix-10
Auto Sleep Mode Appendix-10

B
Booklet from Sheets 1-30
Left side 1-30
Right side 1-31
Top binding 1-31
Border Erase
Copy 1-27
Send 2-28

C
Centering 2-7
Collate/Offset Copying 1-12

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Color
Background Density Adjustment 2-24
Color / Grayscale / Monochrome
Selection 2-25
Combine Mode 1-22
2-in-1 Mode 1-22
4-in-1 Mode 1-22
Page Boundary Lines 1-23
Continuous Scan
Copy 1-47
Send 2-27
Conventions in This Guide -vi
Copy
Originals 1-2
Setup 6-38
Copy Settings 6-38
Auto % Priority 6-40
Auto Paper Selection 6-40
Border Erase for Back Page 6-38
Paper Selection 6-39
Preset Limit 6-41
Quick Setup Registration 6-41
Copying Functions 1-1
Counting the Number of Pages Printed 7-18
by Paper Size 7-21
Counter 7-23
Each Job 7-20
Printing a Report 7-22
Total Job 7-19
Unknown Account ID Jobs 7-23
Cover Mode 1-37
Custom Box
Creating a New Box 4-5
Custom Box List 4-12
Deleting 4-13
Document List 4-13
Moving/Joining/Deleting 4-17
Overlaying Images 4-10
Previewing 4-15
Printing a Document 4-9, 4-18

Index-1

Index

Sending a Document 4-18
Storing a Document 4-7
User Privileges 4-18
Viewing/Editing 4-14

D
Date/Timer 6-70
Auto Error Clear 6-74
Auto Panel Reset 6-72
Auto Sleep 6-73
Date Format 6-71
Date/Time 6-70
Time Zone 6-71
Default 6-21
Auto Image Rotation 6-31
Border Erase 6-29
Collate/Offset 6-31
Color 6-24
Continuous Scan 6-22
Density 6-26
EcoPrint 6-34
E-mail Subject/Body 6-28
File Format 6-25
File Name 6-27
File Separation 6-25
High Comp. PDF Image 6-35
Image Quality 6-23
Margin 6-30
Overlay (Box) 6-33
Overlay (Copy) 6-32
PDF/TIFF/JPEG Image 6-35
Repeat Copying 6-36
Scan Resolution 6-23
Zoom 6-27
Default Gateway Appendix-10
Default Screen 6-3
Density Adjustment
Copy 1-44
Send 2-21
Destination 6-76
Adding 6-76
Adding a Group 6-80
Adding an individual 6-76
Editing 6-81

Index-2

One-touch Key 6-82
Device 5-17
Canceling FAX Communication 5-19
Checking Status 5-17
Configuring 5-18
Displaying Screen 5-17
Partition List 5-19
USB Memory 5-18
DHCP Appendix-10
Document Box 4-1
Basic Operation 4-5
Custom Box 4-2, 4-5
Job Box 4-2, 4-22
Quick Setup Registration 6-46
dpi Appendix-11
Duplex 1-33

E
EcoPrint Mode Appendix-11
Copy 1-46
Emulation 3-4, Appendix-11
Selection 3-4
Setting of page size and pen 3-7
Enlarged Display 6-88
Entry
Body 2-32
Document Name 2-31
File Name 1-54, 2-31
Subject 2-32
Error Handling 6-17

F
File
Format 2-14
PDF 2-16
Separation 2-19
Form Overlay 1-38
FTP Appendix-11

G
Glossary Appendix-10
Grayscale Appendix-11

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Index

IEEE1284 Appendix-11
Image Quality
Copy 1-45
Interface
Parallel Interface 3-2
Serial Interface 3-3
IP Address 6-56, Appendix-11

Management 7-1
Margin/Centering Mode 1-25
Memo 1-42
Mirror Image 1-51
Mixed Sized Originals 1-7
Combinations 1-7
Copy Size 1-8
Send 2-8
Multi Purpose (MP) Tray Appendix-12
Multi-Page Forms
Copy 1-56
Send 2-26

J
Job
Available Status 5-2
Canceling 5-14
Checking History 5-10
Checking Status 5-2
Detailed Information 5-7
Detailed Information of Histories 5-11
Details of the Status Screens 5-3
Displaying History Screen 5-10
Displaying Status Screens 5-2
Pause and Resumption 5-13
Reordering 5-15
Job Accounting 7-11
Managing the Copy/Print Counts 7-15
Restricting the Use of the Machine 7-16
Job Box
Image Overlay Form (Copy) Box 4-29
Private Print/Stored Job Box 4-22
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Print Box 424
Repeat Copy Box 4-28
Job Finish Notice
Copy 1-52
Send 2-33

K
KPDL Appendix-11

L
Label Appendix-8

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

N
Negative Image 1-50
NetBEUI Appendix-12
NetWare 6-57, Appendix-12
Setup 6-57
Network
Setup 6-56
Network Setup
Apple Talk 6-58
NetWare 6-57
TCP/IP Setup (Equipped with DHCP
Server) 6-57

O
One-touch Key
Changing the Registered Information 683
Deleting the Registered Information 684
Editing 6-83
Orientation Confirmation 6-37
Original Orientation 1-10
Document Processor 1-10
Platen 1-10
Send 2-12
Original Size Selection
Send 2-2
Originals
Automatic Detection 6-13

Index-3

Index

Copy 1-2
Custom 6-6
Setup 6-6
Size viii
Size Selection 1-2, 2-2
Output Destination 1-17
Output Tray 6-20

P
Page Numbering 1-40
Paper Appendix-2
Appropriate Paper Appendix-2
Auto Selection 6-14
Cassette 6-8
Custom 6-6
Default Paper Source 6-13
Multi Purpose Tray 6-9
Paper Source for Cover Paper 6-15
Setup 6-6
Size viii
Special Paper 6-15, Appendix-5
Specifications Appendix-2
Weight 6-10
Paper Selection 1-4
Cassette 1-4
Multi Purpose Tray 1-5
Parallel Interface Appendix-12
POP3 Appendix-12
PostScript Appendix-12
PPM Appendix-12
Printer 3-1
Setup 6-48
Printer Driver Appendix-12
Printer Settings 6-48
Copies 6-51
CR Action 6-54
Duplex 6-51
EcoPrint 6-49
Emulation 6-48
Form Feed Timeout 6-53
KIR 6-49
LF Action 6-54
Orientation 6-52
Override A4/Letter 6-50
Resolution 6-48

Index-4

Wide A4 6-53
Printing Reports/Sending Notice 6-59
Font List 6-59
Network Status Page 6-60
Service Status Page 6-61
Status Page 6-59
Transmission Result Reports 6-61
Priority Override 1-55, 5-14
Programmed Copying 1-59
Editing and Deleting 1-60
Recalling 1-59
Registering 1-59
Punch 1-14

R
Repeat Copy 1-57
Maximum Number 1-58
Outputting 1-58
Selecting 1-57
Reserve Next Priority 6-43
Restarting the System 6-86

S
Scan Resolution 2-22
Security 8-1
Security (for Administrators)
After Installation 8-5
Before Installation 8-5
Changing Functions 8-6
Installation 8-5
Method for Overwriting the Entire Hard
Disk 8-6
Security Password 8-6
System Initialization 8-8
The Security Kit Contents 8-5
Warning Message 8-9
Security (for General Users)
Encryption 8-3
Overwriting 8-2
Touch Panel Display 8-4
Send
Image Quality 2-20
Original Size Selection 2-2
Print 2-35

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Index

Setup 6-44
Store 2-36
Sending Functions 2-1
Sending Settings 6-44
High-compression PDF Auto Color 6-45
Quick Setup Registration 6-44
Sending Size Selection 2-4
Setup
AppleTalk 6-58
Copy 6-38
Date/Timer 6-70
NetWare 6-57
Network 6-56
Printer 6-48
Send 6-44
TCP/IP 6-56, 6-57
Sharpness 2-23
Shortcuts 1-61
Adding 1-61
Editing and Deleting 1-62
SMTP Appendix-13
Sound 6-5
SSL
Network Security 6-87
Staple 1-14
Status / Job Cancel 5-1
Status Page Appendix-13
Subnet Mask Appendix-13
Supplies
Checking the Remaining Amount 5-16

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

Switching the Language 6-2
Switching Unit of Measurement 6-17
System Initialization 6-85
System Menu 6-1

T
TCP/IP 6-56, 6-57, Appendix-13
Setup 6-56, 6-57
TWAIN Appendix-13

U
USB Appendix-13
User Login Administration 7-2
Adding 7-5
Changing Properties 7-7
Enabling/Disabling 7-2
Login 7-4
Logout 7-4
Unknown login user name Job 7-9

W
WIA Appendix-13

Z
Zoom Mode
Copy 1-19, 2-6

Index-5

Index

Index-6

ADVANCED OPERATION GUIDE

We recommend the use of our own brand supplies.
We will not be liable for any damage caused by the use of third party supplies in this machine.

2007.11
Rev.3.0

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.7
Linearized                      : No
Author                          : Provided By MANUALSLIB.COM - http://www.manualslib.com/
Create Date                     : 2012:12:11 13:31:59Z
Keywords                        : manuals, instruction manuals, user manuals, service manuals, user guides, pdf manuals, owners manuals, installation guides
Modify Date                     : 2014:12:07 15:15:08+08:00
Subject                         : Search through 700.000 manuals online & and download pdf manuals.
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c005 78.147326, 2012/08/23-13:03:03
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : Provided By MANUALSLIB.COM - http://www.manualslib.com/
Description                     : Search through 700.000 manuals online & and download pdf manuals.
Title                           : ManualsLib - Makes it easy to find manuals online!
Creator Tool                    : pdftk 1.44 - www.pdftk.com
Metadata Date                   : 2014:12:07 15:15:08+08:00
Producer                        : itext-paulo-155 (itextpdf.sf.net-lowagie.com)
Document ID                     : uuid:0e9488b2-917c-f74d-8cba-652ea091ed19
Instance ID                     : uuid:f2800f6e-01a8-8f49-88f3-671004dc4990
Page Count                      : 322

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Kyocera Km 3050 Operation Manual ManualsLib Makes It Easy To Find Manuals Online!

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation